Training Manual Signalling 1907

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized
by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.
https://books.google.com
LIBRARY
AT AT
GRE TH
ETH
BRING
ᎧᎧᎧᎧᎧᎧᎧᎧᎧ
IS
KN
THE OW
LE
DG
E
GIFT
NONESST
MORTVVVI
Q
SCIENTIAM
VIVIFICAVIT
wwwO
Ptolemmas
1
THE JOHN CRERAR

LIBRARY CHICAGO .
O
EDFrench je 1996
1894
[All Rights Reserved.]
40
OHN CRET W.O.
955 .
TRAINING MANUAL SIGNALLING,
1907.
[ REPRINTED, WITH AMENDMENTS, to 1st MAY, 1911. ]
mon
GENERAL STAFF, WAR OFFICE .

LONDON :
PUBLISHED BY HIS MAJESTY'S STATIONERY OFFICE.
To be purchased, either directly or through any Bookseller, from
WYMAN AND SONS, LTD., FETTER LANE, E.C.; or
OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT, EDINBURGH ; or
E. PONSONBY, LTD., 116, GRAFTON STREET, DUBLIN.
PRINTED BY
MACKIE AND CO. , LTD. , WARRINGTON AND LONDON.
Price Sixpence.
L. G.
YRARELI
This manual is issued by command of the Army Council for

the guidance of all concerned.
Ewolbard
WAR OFFICE ,
1st April, 1907.
CONTENTS .
PART I.
CHAPTER . PAGE.
I.-Principles of Signalling- Morse Alphabet 2
II.-Apparatus, and method of using it ... 5
III. Signal Stations 118
IV. The Message Form... 128
V. -The counting, signalling, and entering of
words, certain signs , and figures 147
VI. Station work 156
VII.-Instructions for Signalling between the Navy
and Army 191
PART II .
VIII.—Establishing and working a Signal Station in

the Field 197
IX . ( 1) Establishing and occupying a line of stations
deliberately and 206
General Instructions for Signalling Officers in
the Field 210
X.-General Principles 213
PART III .
XI.-Course of Instruction ... 218
XII.-School of Signalling and General Instructions 238
XIII.-Technical Instructions for the use of Telephones
in the Field 242
APPENDIX I.-Lime-Light, Large 270
APPENDIX II.- Indian Supplement to the Training 276
Manual Signalling
318300-
23 .
A
IV CONTENTS .
PAGE.
1. The heliograph 277
2. To set up the heliograph 279
3. To lay the heliograph 280
4. To signal with the heliograph 283
5. To pack up the heliograph 283
6. To replace a broken mirror 284
7. Cause of defects in a heliograph 284
8. The " CC " lamp 285
9. To trim the " CC " lamp 286
10. To light the " CC " lamp 286
11. Range of " BB " and " CC " lamp 286
12. Establishment of signallers ... 287
13. Miscellaneous instructions 287
INDEX 288
TRAINING MANUAL SIGNALLING .
1907 .
[Reprinted , with amendments , to 1st May, 1911. ]
PART I.
NOTE. The following books will be used as far as they

apply for training in other subjects connected with inter-
communication in the Field : -
1. " FIELD SERVICE REGULATIONS . "
Intercommunication and Orders.
2. " WAR ESTABLISHMENTS (Expeditionary Force).
War Establishment of Communication Troops .
3. " KING'S REGULATIONS .
i Peace Establishment of Signallers .
ii Regulations for attendance at Course of
Instruction.
iii Issue of Proficiency Pay- Signallers .
4. " MOBILIZATION STORE TABLES . "
Equipment in War. ""
5. 46 EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS .
Equipment in Peace. ""
6. " CLOTHING REGULATIONS .'
Issue of badges
"" .
7. " ROYAL WARRANT. '
CTION IN ARMY TELEGRAPHY AND TELEPHONY .
8. " INSTRU
(2110) Wt 1842-73 55,000 5/11 M & Co P14110
2 CHAP. I.- PRINCIPLES OF SIGNALLING .
CHAPTER I.-PRINCIPLES OF SIGNALLING.

1. SYSTEMS OF SIGNALLING .
1. In the Army, the Morse and the Semaphore are the two
systems used by the trained signallers accompanying the
various staffs and units.
2. In the former the letters of the alphabet and the
numerals are represented by certain symbols . In the latter
they are represented by the position of certain objects with
regard to one another.
2. MORSE ALPHABET.
1. Two elements are used, called respectively " dot " and
" dash." These are used singly as in the letters E- one
dot, and T one dash, or variously combined as
F. · or N-- . In no case are more than four
elements used to represent any one letter, and the alphabet
LS so constructed that those letters which occur most
frequently are represented by the shortest symbols .
2. In signalling, these symbols are conveyed by several
different means, but the dot and dash are always dis-
tinguished by the time taken in making them, for, whatever
the length of the dot, the dash takes always three times that
time . In this way the letters may be represented by the
short and long waves of a flag, or short and long exposures
of light, as with the heliograph and lamp, or again, by short
and long calls on whistles, sirens, &c.
3. In order to distinguish between the end of one letter and
the commencement of the next, an interval equal in duration
to one dash is always to be observed after each letter . Great
care must be taken that every letter is made continuously
from start to finish, i.e. , without any interval between the
elements composing it ; this is necessary to prevent a letter
being misread as two or more other letters, which, taken
together would present the same arrangement of dots and
dashes , for example : -W- — — if incorrectly sent , could
be read as E - T - T Or A — T― or E - M From
s. 2.
the first, the signaller should be instructed to grasp the letter

as a whole and not to build up the elements composing it.
When the Morse Alphabet is employed, the underlying idea
of time, as explained above , is never departed from, whatever
may be the apparatus used .
4. The time taken in making the letters will depend upon
the rate of sending and the skill of the signaller.
When sending, and the words are not being answered (as
when at practice), an interval equal to two dashes will be
observed between words.
Good signalling depends upon observing the precise length
of dots, dashes, and separating intervals, and keeping a
uniform time throughout, whatever the speed or rate of
signalling may be.
Morse Alphabet.
ABCDEFGHIKIN
L
M Z
Numerals.
65690
1
2
3
4
Long Numerals.
68690
1
2 7
B
5
CHAP. I.-PRINCIPLES OF SIGNALLING .
Special Signals.
Full Stop - Underline
Inverted commas - Oblique stroke
Parentheses or Horizontal bar
Brackets Hyphen
Break
The above principles are equally applicable to the

" Numerals ," 66' Long Numerals " and 66 Special Signals . "
The " Long Numerals " are used when working with the
Royal Navy, and in telegraphy. In Army signalling the
" Numerals are used . In telegraphy the numerals "
used only in the repetition of figures.
5. As will be seen certain of the numerals have the same
symbols as some of the letters of the alphabet . In order to
distinguish between these, before signalling a numeral, or
group of numerals , the signal FI (figures intended) will be
sent. For the same reason, on the conclusion of the
numerals, and before resuming letters, the signal FF (figures
finished) will be sent.
6. When signalling words, the context is, as a rule, a guide
that the letters have been correctly read , but this is not the
case with figures, and consequently it is necessary that they
be verified . This is done by the " check " ; in which the
figures 1 to 9 are denoted by the first nine letters of the
alphabet, and 0 is denoted by K thus : -
A for 1 F for 6
7890
B 2 G
C 3
D
E 5 K
On receiving a group of numerals , the corresponding letters
are signalled back.
For example 1 is checked by A
12 "" 99 AB .
123 39 ABC .
4210 "" DBAK
s. 3. 5
7. In signalling, each word or group is acknowledged before

sending the next ; with certain exceptions (as in the case of
the numerals and cipher) , the general answer," one dash,
is employed for this purpose .
CHAPTER II.
APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
3. APPARATUS.
Flags. Lime-Light.
Dummy Key. Lime-Light (Large) .
Semaphore. Begbie Lamp.
Heliograph . Telescopes and Binoculars .
Buzzer.
4. FLAGS.
1. The large flags are 3 feet square ; they are of two colours ,
white with a blue horizontal stripe for use with a dark
background, and dark blue for use with a light background.
The pole is 5 feet 6 inches long, 1 inch in diameter at the
butt and tapering to inch at the point.
The small flags are of the same colours, 2 feet square, with
a pole 3 feet 6 inches long, inch in diameter at the butt,
and tapering to inch at the point.
2. The distances at which these flags can be read depends
upon the nature and colour of the background , the state of
the atmosphere, and the power of the telescope employed.
6 CHAP. II.- APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
In England and similar climates, the larger flags can as a

rule be read at distances varying from 5 to 7 miles , and the
smaller, from 3 to 4 miles, using morse, and from 1 to 2 miles ,
using semaphore.
With a clear atmosphere, they can both be read at longer
distances .
3. Flags are the most portable means of signalling, but they
can only be seen at long distances when kept unfurled and in
rapid motion.
Particular attention must be paid to the signals being
made so that they can be read at the greatest distance, or
under the most adverse circumstances ; with this object the
following points must be explained and observed.
i. The signaller must stand exactly facing, or, with his
back to the distant station, according to the direction of the
wind, but whatever the latter, he must stand square, so that
he can wave the flag at right angles to the line of sight to
the distant station .
ii . The pole must be kept upright and the point not
allowed to droop to the front or rear, so that the flag is
waved in a vertical plane, and not swept round to the front,
or overhead .
iii. The pole must be held at the extremity of the butt .
iv. All motions of the flag must be sharp.
v. The flag must be kept fully exposed when sending ; it
must at other times be completely hidden from the view of
the distant station .
vi. The dots and dashes must be uniform in length ; and
bear the correct proportion to one another.
"" vii. The flag must always be brought back fully to the
Ready," care being taken that it is checked so as not to
pass that point.
4. To assist the learner to keep the flag unfurled , he should
be instructed to wave it so that the point of the pole describes
an elongated figure of eight.
When using the flag the motions should be performed
freely with the aid of both arms and wrists, the body should
not be constrained in any way.
s. 4. 7
PREPARE TO SIGNAL
8 CHAP II. APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
READY.
s. 4.
" DASH," FIRST POSITION.

10 CHAP . II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
5. FALLING IN FOR LARGE AND SMALL FLAG DRILL.
1. THE ORDER.-The squad will fall in, in two ranks , dressing
by the right, flag held unfurled perpendicularly at the right
side, butt on the ground. The right arm to be slightly bent,
the pole to be held by the thumb and forefinger, thumb
against the thigh, the flag gathered in with the remaining
fingers .
2. When each man has got his dressing he will stand at
ease.
Movement or Cautions and Words Detail.

Position. of Command.
6. To Stand At Stand At- Ease ... Keeping the legs straight, carry
Ease from the the left foot about one foot
Order. (Large length to the left so that
and small flag the weight of the body rests
drill.) equally on both feet, at the
same time incline the point
of the pole slightly to the
front with the right hand,
arm close to the side, the
left arm to be kept in the
position of attention.
7. The Attention Squad-Attention ... The left foot will be brought

from Stand At up to the right, and the flag
Ease. (Large returned to the order.
and small flag
drill.)
8. The Short No word ofcommand. Raise the pole about three inches
Trail. (Large from the ground, keeping it
and small flag close to the body.
drill.)
s. 9. 11
Movement or Cautions andWords

Position. of Command. Detail.
9. Fall In As in Section 5.
(i) Opening the
ranks.
(Large and small Squad- Number As usual.
flag and sema-
phore drill.)
To the Right (or All except the file on the flank
Left) to Two Paces from which the extension is
-Extend. to be made will turn in the
required direction, and step
off together in quick time,
carrying the flag at the short
trail, halting and turning in
the original direction in file
at the distance ordered from
the file on the left (or right)
and taking up the dressing
by the named flank.
For Flag Drill The rear rank will step back

Open -Out. two paces.
Squad-March ... Odd numbers of the front rank

will take four paces forward
and the even numbers of the
rear rank will step back four
paces. On completion of
the ordered number of paces,
each man will take up his
dressing by the flank from
which the extension has
been made.
Right (or Left)- The squad will turn in the re-

Turn, or Incline. quired direction. (Accord-
ing to the wind.)
Movement or Cautions and Words

(ii) Closing the Reform- Ranks ... The odd numbers of the front
ranks. rank will turn about.
(Large and small
flag and sema-
phore drill .) Squad-March The odd numbers of the front
rank will take four paces
forward, halt, and turn about.
The odd numbers of the
rear rank will take two, the
even numbers of the rear 6
paces forward and halt.
On the Right (or All except the file on the

Left)-Close. named flank will turn in the
required direction, step off
in quick time, carrying the
flag at the short trail, halt
and front as they reach
their places, coming to the
order and taking up their
dressing by that flank.
10. FOLDING THE FLAGS (LARGE AND SMALL).
To fold the flags, hold the pole in the right hand , under the
arm -pit, butt to the rear, seize the left top corner of the flag
folding it diagonally across to the right bottom corner, and
taking care that the two ends of the tape are clear, then by
a twisting motion roll the folded flag round the pole and secure
the end.
s. 11. 13

11. Large Flag Prepare to- Signal Carry off the left foot about one
Drill. foot length to the left, cant
the pole with the right hand
upwards to the left, catching
it with the left hand about
the centre, at the same time
seize the pole with the right
hand below the flag, then
grasp the flag with the left
hand in line with the right,
both hands to be close to-
gether and level with the
waist, the pole to point up-
wards across the point of
the left shoulder.
NOTE.-With men of different
statures, the actual distance
at which the left foot is
placed from the right, when
at the Prepare to Signal
will vary, as also will the
distance below the flag the
right hand should grasp the
pole.
Ready Letting the flag fly, raise the
:
pole with the right hand, at

the same time seize the butt
with the left. The left
elbow should be at the side,
fore-arm square, the left
hand about 6 inches in front
of the centre of the body.
The pole should be held
high enough to see under-
neath the flag when in
motion. The eyes to look
to the front. The pole to
be at the same angle as
when at the Prepare to
Signal.
1842 B

11. Large Flag Prepare to - Signal Lower the pole with the right
Drill- cont. hand, at the same time
gathering the flag in with
the left ; both hands to be
close together and level
with the waist, the pole to
point upwards across the
point of the left shoulder.
NOTE.-(i) When giving instruc-
tions the squad should be
at the " Prepare to Signal."
(ii) All signals are made from
the "Ready."
Ready As above.
Dot by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

One hands, bring theflag from the
Ready to a corresponding
position on the opposite
side of the body.
Two Bring the flag smartly back to

the Ready.
Dot in Quick Time Combine the motions of the

-Go dot by numbers without any
pause.
s. 11. 15

11. Large Flag Two, Three, & c., Make the required number of
Drill-cont. Dots dots (or a succession of
or dots), without any pause.
Succession of Dots
-Go
Steady Return to the Ready.

NOTE. -The command " Steady"
is given when making a
succession of dots or dashes.
Dash by Numbers Pivoting the pole between the

One hands, bringthe flag from the
Ready to the opposite side
of the body, till the point
of the pole is about 18
inches from the ground,
right arm straight, left
elbow to be kept at the
side, the left hand and fore-
arm to be allowed to come
up freely with the butt of
the pole.
Two Bring the flag smartly back to

the Ready.
Dash in Quick Time Combine the two motions of

-Go the dash by numbers.
16 CHAP . II .-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.

11. Large Flag Two, Three, &c., Make the required number of
Drill- cont. Dashes dashes (or a succession of
or dashes), without any pause
A Succession of at the Ready.
Dashes
-Go
Steady As above.
Prepare to- Signal . As above.
Order-Flags Seize the pole with the fore-

finger and thumb of the left
hand, then grasp the pole
and flag with the right
hand just above the left,
bring it to the order, close
the feet, and bring the left
hand to the side.
12. Small Flag Prepare to- Signal. Carry the left foot about one
Drill. foot length to the left, cant
the pole with the right hand
upwards to the left, catching
it with the left hand about
the centre at the same time
seize the pole with the right
hand about 6 inches from
the butt, then grasp the flag
with the left hand in line
with the right, both hands
to be close together and
level with the waist, the pole
to point upwards across the
s. 12 . 17

12. Small Flag Ready ... Letting the flag fly, raise the
Drill-cont. pole with the right hand
grasping it at the extremity
of the butt with the left,
which should be level with
the chin, and about 8 inches
from it. Both elbows free !
from the body, the eyes to
look to the front, the pole
to be at the same angle as
when at the Prepare to
Signal.
Prepare to- Signal. Lower the pole with the right

hand, at the same time
gathering the flag in with
the left ; both hands to be
close together and level
with the waist, the pole to
point upwards across the
NOTE. When giving instruc-
tions the squad should be at
the " Prepare to Signal ."
(ii All signals will be made
from the " Ready."
Ready ... As above.
Dot by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

One. hands, bring it smartly from
the Ready to a corresponding
position on the opposite
side of the body.

12. Small Flag Two. Bring the flag smartly back to

Drill-cont. the Ready.
Dot in Quick Time Combine the motions of the

-Go. dot by numbers without any
pause.
Two, Three, &c.,Dots Make the required number of

or dots (or a succession of
Succession of Dots dots), without any pause ;
-Go. the hands not to be allowed
to drop.
-Steady. Return to the Ready.

NOTE. The command " Steady'
is given when making a
succession of dots or dashes.
Dash by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

One. hands, bring it from the
Ready to the opposite side
of the body till the point of
the pole is slightly below
the horizontal.
Two. Bring the flag smartly back to

the Ready.
s. 12. 19

12. Small Flag Dash in Quick Time Combine the motions of the
Drill- cont. -Go. Dash by numbers.
Two, Three, &c., Make the required number of

Dashes dashes ( or a succession of
or dashes), without any pause
Succession of Dashes at the Ready.
-Go.
--Steady. As above.
Prepare to -Signal As above.
Order-Flags Seize the pole with the fore-

finger and thumb of the left
hand, just above the right,
then grasp the pole and flag
about 8 inches from the top
with the right hand, bring
it to the order, close the
feet and bring the left hand
to the side.
20
20 CHAP. II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT .
PREPARE TO SIGNAL.
77
s. 12. 21
READY.
22
22 CHAP. II .-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
DOT, FIRST POSITION.

1
s. 12. 23.
DASH.
1
24 CHAP. II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.

13. LETTERS AND FIGURES BY NUMBERS.
The letters and figures in this practice are divided into
parts by observing a pause when at the first position of a
Dash.
Letters and figures not having a Dash in their composition
are not so divided .
The following letters and figure are given as examples .

Letters and Letter A by Num-

Figures by bers -One Make a dot and without any
Numbers. pause come down to the first
position of a dash.
Two ... Return to the Ready, thus com-
pleting the letter.
Letter S-Go Make three dots without any
pause, thus completing the
letter.
Letter F by Num-
bers -One Make a succession of two dots,
and without any pause come
downto thefirst position of
a dash.
Two Return to Ready, and without
any pause made a dot, thus
completing the letter.
Figure 3 by Numbers
1 -One ... Make a succession of three dots,
and without any pause come
down to the first position of
a dash.
s. 14. 25

of Command. Detail.
Position.
Letters and Two Return to the Ready, and with-
Figures by out any pause come down to
Numbers- cont. the first position of a dash.
Three ... Return to the Ready, thus com-
pleting the figure.
14. LETTERS AND FIGURES IN QUICK TIME .

When those under instruction have been thoroughly taught
the letters and figures by numbers, they will then be
instructed in making them as a whole. In this practice
words
66 of command will be given whilst the squad is at the
Prepare to Signal , " the following is an example :
of Command. Detail.
Position.
Letters and Letter A, etc., or Come to the Ready, make a
Figures in Figure 3, etc.- Go slight pause, send what was
Quick Time. ordered, and on completion,
again make a slight pause,
and return to the Prepare
to signal.
NOTE (i). In this manner, com-
binations of letters, num-
erals, entire words, miscel-
laneous signs with their
answers, prefixes, code time,
check, &c., should be taught.
(ii).-When the above are
thoroughly known, the mode
of sending a service mes-
sage, asking for repetitions,
&c., should be carried out,
by writing a Service message
on a black board, those
under instruction sending
the signs, words, answers,
repetitions, &c., as ordered
by the instructor.
28
26
CHAP
APPARATUS
.
II
.-
METHOD
AND
USING
OF
IT
.
15. DUMMY KEY.
1. This instrument is only used for instructional purposes.

2. The sound made by it is similar to that of a telegraph
sounder.
3. From the first signallers should be instructed in reading
from and sending on this instrument.
4. When sending the knob should be held with the thumb and
two first fingers, the key being depressed evenly and to its
full extent for dots as well as dashes ; the fingers should not
leave the knob, but by relaxing the pressure the spring should
be allowed to pull the key back to its normal position . At
first the learner should be instructed to make the letters by

numbers as when at flag drill. When the letters can be
thus formed correctly, they may be made in quick time, the
instructor first making the letter so as to give the learner a
correct idea of the time. After this, letters may be grouped ,
and sentences, messages , etc. , sent as an exercise. Great
pains should be taken to ensure the learner forming the
letters correctly and uniformly and observing the correct
separating intervals. Sending at fast rates should not be
attempted before a good style has been acquired at slower
ones. The hand and wrist must work quite freely and with-
out constraint ; the signaller should practise sending with
both hands, the disengaged one being kept on the baseboard
so as to hold the instrument firmly. At first the beat should
be as large as possible, but afterwards it must be gradually
reduced .
5. By obtaining a complete mastery in sending on the
dummy key, much time will be saved in acquiring proficiency
in sending, both on the heliograph and lamps .
/ s. 16. 27
16. SEMAPHORE.
1. This system is an adaptation of that used in the Royal Navy,
in which the letters of the alphabet, numerals and special
signs are indicated by the relative positions of two revolving
arms to one another and to a third fixed arm called the
" indicator." The former are mounted on a common pivot
and are arranged so that both revolve in a vertical plane.
The circle described by one complete revolution of the arms
may be imagined to be divided into eight equal parts , each
giving a separate radial position for the arms, which when
forming a sign are never less than 45 degrees apart. When
not signalling both arms hang vertically downwards. Before
commencing to signal the indicator is shown either on the
right or left of the upright standard carrying the whole
apparatus ; its use is to indicate from which side the signs
commence .
2. The first seven letters A to G are made by keeping one
arm stationary and moving the other to the seven positions ,
starting always on the same side as the indicator and moving
in the same direction as the hands of the clock through
successive angles of 45 degrees . The next six letters H to N
(omitting J) are made by moving one arm to the 1st position
(or letter A), keeping it there, and moving the other as before
to the remaining six positions. The letters O to S are made
by moving the stationary arm to the 2nd position (or letter
B) and moving the revolving one to the remaining five posi-
tions . The letters T and U are made on the same principle .
The remaining letters and special signs do not follow this
sequence but are made in a similar manner (vide diagram) .
The same signs are used for the numerals 1 to 0 as for the
letters A to K (omitting J) , but are distinguished from the
latter by being preceded by the " numeral sign " (equivalent
to FI on the Morse system) and followed by the " alpha-
betical sign " (equivalent to FF on the Morse system). They
are checked by being repeated back.
When sending words , groups , etc. , the arms are moved from
letter to letter and are both brought in to the non -signalling
position on completion of the word.
28
SEMAPHOR
ALPHABET
N, UMERALSE
SPECIAL
AND
.SIGNS
7 f 7
C E F L N
M
2 3 5
6 7 8
‫ܘܢ ܣ‬
TONYT
S
R W
X
KTN
NUMERAL
SIGN
F
FOLLOW
ERASE
).( IGURES ALPHABETICAL
(LETTERS
).SIGN
FOLLOW
small
showsThe
called
iarm
a
at
,"the
side
the
which
from sndicator
nd
the
Alphabet
signs
signaller
w he
,tcommence
;or
fworking
a hen
ixed
semaphore
sometimes
visible
a
,not
isnd
indicator
the
necessary
is
because
his
towards
be
may
.back
reader
Ithe
also
often
happens
on
tship
'board
a that
semaphore
signal
being
from
atread
both
sides
,same
time
unless
aisnd
the
indicator
was
used
t he
reverse
letters
might
be
eread
f,K
V. .g.
or
CHAP . II.—APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
s. 16. 29
3. The apparatus as used in the Royal Navy may have arms

up to 12 feet in length, and is mounted in some conspicuous
position. It is worked from the deck by crank handles and
is so constructed that the position of the arms correspond to
those into which the crank handles are moved ; the apparatus
may be trained in any direction . Semaphores constructed
and worked on these lines are very useful for maintaining
communication between fixed points, such as along a line of
blockhouses and coast defence forts, and they possess the
advantage of being easily arranged so as to be worked from
under cover.
4. In the field this rapid and simple means of signalling is
usefully employed at short distances such as between columns
and their advanced or rear guards, across rivers, defiles , or
fire swept zones, and to connect an attacking line with its
supports. Under these circumstances the signaller's arms
are used in accordance with the above principles , and in order
that they may be more readily seen , a conspicuous object
such as a handkerchief or small flag may be held in each
hand ; the place of the indicator is taken by arranging that
the parties in communication always face one another . At
drill and generally speaking, signallers will use the 66 small
flags described for use with the Morse system under Flags . '
5. The simplest method of learning the alphabet and other
signs is by circles , thus : -
1st Circle. A to G.
2nd "" H to N, omitting J.
3rd O to S.
4th T. U, Y and " Erase ."
5th "Numeral Sign, " J (or " Alphabetical Sign " )
and V.
6th W and X , and
7th "" Z.
At drill, in the 1st circle , the letters A to D will be made with
the right arm and E to G with the left ; examples : -O will be
made by putting the right arm to the 2nd position or the
letter B, and the left to C ; to make P from O, the right arm
will be kept still and the left moved to D.
1842 C
6. When letters follow one another, as in a word or group , the
flags will not be brought back to the ready after each letter ,
but if an arm is already in position to form or assist to form
the next it will be kept steady. Thus, to send the word
"can," the right arm is first placed at Cafter a slight pause
brought down to A and kept steady, and after a similar
slight pause the left is placed at G which with the right at
A forms the next letter required , viz. , N.
7. When not at drill the letters should be formed with the
arms in the most convenient manner ; thus in sending the
word " who," the O may be made from the H either by
moving both arms through 45 degrees or by keeping the one
at B steady and moving that at A to C. But in making
letters where only one arm is used that arm should not be
brought across the body ; thus in making the letter C alone.
the right should be employed.
s. 16. 31
PREPARE TO SIGNAL.
READY .
s. 16. 38
333
First Circle.
A AND 1.
.
IT
USING
OF
METHOD
B AND 2.
AND
APPARATUS
.-
II
.
CHAP
324
35
s. 16.
C AND 3.
36 CHAP . II.- APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
D AND 4.
s. 16. 37
E AND 5.
22222
F AND 6.
s. 16. 39
G AND 7.
End of first Circle.

Second Circle.
H AND 8.
s. 16. 41
I AND 9.
42 OHAP . II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
K AND 0.
333
s. 16. 43
L.
44 CHAP. II. APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
M.
s. 16. 45
N.
End of Second Circle.
1842 D
CHAP. II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
46
Third Circle.
0.
17
s. 16. 47
P.
s. 16. 49
R.
S.
End of Third Circle.

51
s. 16.
Fourth Circle .
T.
22
U.
53
s. 16.
Y.
ERASE.
End of Fourth Circle.

55
s. 16.
Fifth Circle.
NUMERICAL SIGN.
CHAP . II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
56
J.
s. 16. 57
V.
End of Fifth Circle.
Sixth Circle.
W.
s. 16. 59
X.
End of Sixth Circle,

Seventh Circle.
Z.
s 17. 61
17. SEMAPHORE DRILL.
THE PREPARE TO SIGNAL.-The squad will fall in, in two

ranks , dressing by the right, flags held perpendicularly, one
in each hand grasping the pole about six inches from the butt,
flags gathered in . When each man has got his dressing he
will stand at ease.

18. To Stand At Stand At--Ease Place the right hand over the
Ease from the left in front of the body at
Prepare to- the full extent of the arms,
Signal. at the same time carry the
left foot about one foot
length to the left.
19. The Atten- Squad-Attention The left foot will be brought

tion from up to the right and the flags
Stand At-- returned to the Prepare to
Ease. Signal.
20. Semaphore Fall In As in Section 17.

Drill.
Squad- Number As usual.

NOTE. The ranks will be open-
ed and closed as in flag drill
(see Section 9).
1842 E

Position . of Command, Detail.
20. Semaphore Squad- Ready Letting the flags fly, carry the
Drill-cont. left foot about one foot
length to the left, at the same
time drop the flags in front
of the legs at the full extent
of the arms, the right pole
crossed over the left.
NOTE.-(i ) The squad will be
brought to the Stand at
Ease from the Ready and
vice versâ by giving the
respective commands, the
position of the feet remain-
ing unaltered .
(ii) All signals are made from
the Ready.
Prepare to- Signal Return to the Prepare to signal,

at the same time the left
foot will be brought back
to the right.
21. Letters , Letter (B, etc.) , Bring the flag or flags to the
Numbers and by Numbers position of the letter or
Special Signs, One. sign ordered.
by Numbers
(Semaphore).
Two. Bring the flag or flags back to
the Ready.
NOTE.-All the signs should be
gone through by numbers as
above, the instructor seeing
that whatever letter, etc., is
ordered the exact position
is taken up, and taking care
that the word Two is not
given before he is satisfied
on this point.
8. 22. 63

22. Letters, Letter A (B, etc. ) Bring the flag or flags to the
Numbers and Go. required position , observe a
Special Signs, slight pause, then return to
in Quick Time the Ready.
(Semaphore). NOTE. (i ) When the squad can
make the letters, numerals
and special signs correctly
and without hesitation, they
should be instructed in
sending words, groups of
figures, etc., as when at flag
drill on the morse system ;
the instructor should see
that a uniform pause is made
on the letters and that the
flags are moved sharply from
position to position.
(ii) When this can be done
proficiently they will be
instructed in message work,
taking into consideration
the differences between the
morse and semaphore
systems (see Section 177).
23. POINTS TO BE BORNE IN MIND WHEN SENDING SEMAPHOKE.
The following points must be carefully attended to both at

drill and when actually sending messages .
i . The signaller must stand exactly facing the station he is
sending to.
ii. The flags must not be thrown to the rear and must be
held at the full extent of the arms and in exact prolongation
of them.
64 CHAP. II. APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
iii . The arms must be placed at the exact positions indicat-

ing the letters , signs , etc.
iv. When making the letters T, O , W, and the numeral sign
the flags must be separated and not covering one another.
v. The signaller should turn slightly on the hips when
making such letters as I, X, etc. , but the eyes must continue
to look straight to the front.
vi. When double letters occur the flags are to be brought
well into the body after the first letter is made.
vii. The flags are to be kept unfurled and to be moved
quickly from one letter or sign to the next ; a pause is to be
made on the letter or sign according to the rate of sending.
viii . When sending is going on everyone except the
signaller must stand clear of the flags.
ix. Both flags should be of the same colour.
THE HELIOGRAPH .
24. THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS .
With the heliograph signalling is effected by reflecting the

light of the sun from a mirror or mirrors on to the distant
station in accordance with the Morse system .
25. REFLECTION OF LIGHT AND DEFINITIONS .
Light travels in straight lines called rays . If a plane
mirror is placed in the path of these rays, the light will be
reflected in accordance with the following laws.
1st Law. The angle of reflection is equal to the angle of
incidence .
2nd Law. The incident ray, the normal and reflected ray
are always in the same plane.
i. Incident ray : -The incident ray is the line along which
the light travels before striking the reflecting
surface.
ii. Reflected ray : -The reflected ray is the line along which
the light travels after striking the reflecting surface.
s 26. 65
iii. Normal : -The normal is a line at right angles to the

reflecting surface at the point where the ray strikes
it.
iv. Angle of incidence : -The angle of incidence is formed
by the incident ray and the normal.
v. Angle of reflection : -The angle of reflection is formed
by the reflected ray and the normal .
Now suppose light
to come from the sun
S and to strike the mir-
ror at the point R and
to be reflected in the
direction RD, then we
Σ
see from the first law

that the angle DRP
(angle of reflection) is
R -P
equal to the angle SRP
(angle of incidence),
RP the normal being
M at right angles to the
mirror MM.
Or in other words,
D in order to reflect the
light on a distant point
the mirror must be placed at right angles to an imaginary
line half-way between the direction of the sun and of the
distant point.
This must be borne in mind in using the heliograph.
26. APPARENT MOTION OF THE SUN.

1. If the source of light did not move it would be unnecessary
to alter the position of the mirror so long as we wished to
keep the light reflected on one distant point . But during
the course of the day the sun appears to move gradually from
east to west, and moreover its altitude or apparent height
66 CHAP . II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT .
above the horizon , also varies, gradually increasing until

noon (when the sun is crossing the meridian or north and
south line) and then gradually decreasing. Therefore if we
wish to keep the reflected light in one direction, it is neces-
sary to counteract the apparent motion of the sun by
continuously altering the position of the signalling mirror.
As the path which the sun appears to trace varies with the
locality and season of the year , the mirror must be capable
of being moved into any position , and it is therefore mounted
so that it can be turned both on a vertical and a horizontal
axis. It is impossible to lay down a rule applying to every
locality, regarding the direction of the vertical and horizontal
motions to be given to the mirror, but it should be remem-
bered that it must always be made to follow the sun both
horizontally from east to west and up or down according to
the time of day.
2. Owing to refraction of the sun's rays when striking and
passing through the atmosphere surrounding the earth, the
rate at which the sun appears to be moving varies, being
greatest immediately after sunrise and before sunset and
least before and after midday. It is therefore necessary to
alter the rate of moving the mirror accordingly.
27. DUPLEX MIRROR. 1

1. When the sun and distant station are in opposite direc-
tions, it becomes impossible to reflect the light from one
mirror alone, in the required direction . Moreover, the greater
the angles of incidence and reflection become, the more is the
intensity of the reflected light diminished , and consequently
the distance at which it can be seen is also diminished .
2. It has been found that owing to the above considerations ,
when the sum of the angles of incidence and reflection would
be equal to , or greater than 90 degrees, a second mirror
called the " Duplex " must be placed so that the light from
the sun is reflected from the signalling mirror on to it, and
thence to the distant station . As the light striking the
s. 23. 67
duplex always comes from the signalling mirror , which can

be moved so as to follow the apparent motion of the sun, it is
unnecessary to move the duplex in order to keep the light
on the distant station ; but the signalling mirror must be
moved to keep the light on the duplex .
28. METHOD OF SIGNALLING.

There are two positions of the signalling mirror , namely,
the " position of rest " and " position of signalling .' In the
""
former, which corresponds to the " Ready on the flag, the
light is thrown on the ground somewhat below or on the near
side of the distant station . In the latter the light is thrown
fully on the distant station . The heliograph is aligned and
the mirror placed in the signalling positions so that the light
is on the distant station. The mirror is next turned down-
wards66 through a small vertical angle and is thus brought to
the position of rest, " in which it is kept automatically.
The mirror is in connection with a key, and on working this
similarly to the dummy key, the mirror is brought to and
kept at the signalling position for short and long periods
of time corresponding to the dots and dashes in the Morse
alphabet and various signs .
29. ALIGNING THE HELIOGRAPH .
1. As it is impossible to see whether the reflected light is on

the distant station, a sighting mark on a vane is brought into
alignment with the centre of the mirror and the distant
station. A small circle (1" diameter) is left unsilvered in the
centre of the mirror, and this causes a small shadow to be
thrown on the vane.
2. If the alignment be true it is only necessary to see that
when the mirror is in the signalling position , this shadow
spot covers the sighting mark on the vane ; the reflected
light will then be fully on the distant station. When using
the duplex mirror a paper vane is attached to the mirror

itself so that the sighting mark coincides with its centre .
In aligning, the duplex is placed so that the reflection at its
centre, of the distant station will be visible from the centre
of the signalling mirror. In other words, the duplex is
placed so that the unsilvered spot at the centre of the
signalling mirror hides the reflections of the sighting mark
and distant station .
3. The signalling mirror is so mounted that all motion
imparted to it takes place about its centre. Hence this
motion will not disturb the alignment.
30. GENERAL REMARKS .
1. The distance at which the heliograph can be used depends

on (a) the size of the mirror. A large mirror gives a more
intense or brighter flash than a small one owing to the
greater number of rays that strike it. (b) The angles at
which the rays strike and leave the mirror. (c) The state
of the atmosphere .
2. The lateral range of the heliograph is due to the fact that
the rays of light from the sun falling on any point in the
mirror form a cone, and therefore the rays after the reflec-
tion also form a cone. The angles of these cones are equal ,
and consequently the lateral range bears the same proportion
to the distance between the stations as the diameter of the
sun bears to its distance from the earth ; this is approximately
1 : 107.
Thus if the mirror be aligned on a distant point the light
will be visible on either side of this point up to one half of
the distance divided by 107 ; for example, if the stations
are 6 miles apart, the flash, theoretically, will be visible about
50 yards on either side of the station.
In practice it will be found that the lateral range is
generally somewhat greater .
8. 31. 69
31. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE HELIOGRAPH.

1. These are : —
i. Portability.
ii. Range. With the 5" mirror in favourable atmos-
pheres signals can be easily read at a distance
of 70 miles .
iii. Secrecy. The lateral range at 6 miles is about
50 yards on either side of the distant station .
.iv . Rapidity. With a well-balanced instrument the
labour of sending is no more than that of using
a dummy key, and therefore a high rate can be
kept up for a long time.
Moreover, the flash from a heliograph is readily seen , and
communication is therefore more readily opened with it than
with any other instrument. On the other hand to use the
heliograph with the best results requires considerable train-
ing and practice, and attention must be paid to its being
carefully handled , otherwise it will rapidly become
unserviceable.
2. The heliograph can be used with the light from the moon
or from any artificial source, such as an electric light, but
the range is limited to short distances varying with the power
of the light employed.
32. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
1. The service pattern instruments are made in different
sizes ; these vary slightly in the details of their construction ,
but the principles are the same in each case . The medium
size is that generally used , i.e. , one having an exposed mirror
surface of 5 inches .
Heliograph, 5" (Mark III).

A. Stand. E. Tangent screw head.
B. Signalling mirror in F. Key.
metal frame. G. Key spring.
C. U. arms for ditto . H. Capstan screw.
D. Tangent box with lid I. Collar .
below.
J. Vertical rod in vertical R. Unsilvered spot at centre

socket. of signalling mirror .
K. Clamping screw for S. German silver ball at-
ditto . tached to claw (S') .
L. Jointed arm . T. Base plate .
M. Clamping screw for U. Key bridge .
ditto. V. Key bearing.
N. Gun clip . W. Anchoring hook.
O. Clamping screw at end X. Duplex mirror with sight-
of jointed arm. ing vane and mark.
P. Sighting rod . Y. U arms for ditto .
Q. Sighting vane and Z. Butterfly or pivoting
mark. screw .
2. The heliograph is carried in a leather case provided with
shoulder and waist straps, the latter to prevent jolting when
riding. The body, comprising the base plate, central pivot ,
U-arms, key bearing and tangent box, is made of gun-metal
and cast in one piece. The body is attached to the main
socket by the central pivot secured by a washer and main
socket screw, which must not be fastened too tightly or too
loosely, but so that the tangent screw is able to give the
necessary horizontal motion, and that there is no undue
shaking. The main socket is threaded internally to screw
on to the stand. Its upper portion is toothed externally into
which fits the thread of the tangent screw. เ
33. STAND .
The stand consists of three mahogany legs, united at the
top by a brass head provided with a screw for receiving the
main socket of the heliograph . When the stand is not in
use the screw head is protected by a cap , attached to one of
the legs by a chain, a leather sling is attached to one of the
legs for carrying purposes.
34. MIRROR .
A plane glass circular mirror, the back of which is coated
with hard paint to preserve the silvered portion from damp
8. 34 71
and injury, is used . It is mounted in a metal frame to show

a surface 5" in diameter. This frame is furnished with
trunnions which rest in the bearings of the U-arms, a portion
of one of which is detachable . The centre of the mirror is left
unsilvered , showing a circular spot in diameter .
S'
S
K
H
H.
L T-
G
N M
EK
HELIOGRAPH WITH SIGHTING VANE.

X
72
12
'
-S
SLE
B
N CHAP
.
II
.-
K APPARA
R !
C
Y
C Y
AND
-
<
H
F L METHOD
U G
T
E
1074
No OF
N
M MIR
.WITROR
LEX
H RAPH USING
DUPIOG
HEL
IT
.
の
W
s. 35. 73
35. HORIZONTAL MOTION.
1. The tangent box carries the "Tangent screw" ; the worm
of this screw being made to engage the teeth on the main
socket by a V spring resting in the tangent box and bearing
against the shank of the tangent screw, which passes through
the end of the tangent box and is fitted with an ebonite
milled head.
By turning this head the body (together with the mirror)
is given a slow horizontal motion round the main socket.
2. Should a quicker horizontal motion be required (either
whilst aligning the heliograph or searching the country for
an unknown station) it may be obtained by putting the
tangent screw out of gear (see Section 44). The U-arms are
so placed that the centre of the mirror and the centre of the
pivot are in a vertical plane, consequently no horizontal
motion imparted to the mirror about the pivot will alter the
position of the unsilvered spot at its centre .
36. VERTICAL MOTION.

The mirror can turn vertically on its trunnions resting in
the bearings of the U-arms . Attached to the rim of the
mirror frame are two cock pieces forming the " claw. " The
German silver ball is provided with trunnions resting in
bearings on the claw. The upper end of the vertical rod has
a screw thread which engages the threads of the German
silver ball ; the lower end is plain and can be clamped at any
convenient height in the vertical socket by means of the
clamping screw. The socket is fitted with a swivel arrange-
ment at the lower end, and is secured by a pin passing
through the rear end of the key. The " collar" is rigidly secured
to the socket, and on turning it the vertical rod is screwed
through the German silver ball which travels up or down it,
and thereby causes the mirror to move vertically . If it
should be necessary to give the mirror a considerable vertical
motion , this may be done by moving the vertical rod in or
out of the " socket," the clamping screw being first released.
This means should always be used when not sending in
preference to turning the " collar," so as to preserve the

threads of the vertical rod and German silver ball as much
as possible.
37. KEY.
1. The rear end of the key is secured to the bottom of the
vertical column as above. The front end is secured to the
" key-bearing " in a similar way. The " key-spring 22 is
screwed down at one end to the upper surface of the base
plate, the other end is free and bears against the under edge
of the key tending to force it , and with it the vertical column
upwards ; by this means the mirror is kept in the " position
of rest ."
2. When it is desired to bring the light on to the distant
station , the key is moved by pressing down the collar, thus
inclining the mirror upwards ; by the same action the key
spring is compressed , but as soon as the pressure on the collar
is removed, this spring comes into action and the mirror is
brought back to the " position of rest."
38. BEAT .
The distance through which the key is moved when
signalling is called the " beat. " This can be regulated to
suit the skill of the signaller , and the distance between the
stations . The key passes under the bridge, which is secured
to the base plate by two screws. The capstan screw passes
through the top of the bridge , and bears against the upper
edge of the key . The amount of the beat is thus regulated
by screwing or unscrewing the capstan screw ; as soon as it
is satisfactory, it can be so kept by screwing down the milled
lock nut until it is in contact with the top of the bridge.
39. JOINTED ARM .
This is secured externally to the lower portion of the main
socket by a clamping screw ; it can be fixed in any required
direction, and is for the purpose of carrying the duplex
mirror or sighting rod and vane.
s. 40. 75
40. DUPLEX MIRROR .

The duplex mirror is similar to the signalling mirror ; the
stem on its U-arm can be clamped in the socket at the end
of the jointed arm . It is provided with a butterfly screw to
clamp it at any required elevation .
41. THE CASE .
This contains one spare mirror in a padded wooden parti-
tion, a set of spare parts and screws , three screw drivers , oil
bottle and spanner for the hexagon-headed screws .
USING THE HELIOGRAPH .

42. TO SET UP THE STAND .
1. Unstrap and separate the legs ; place the stand on the
ground, keeping the brass head as level as possible ; the legs
should be separated to a distance about equal to the height
of the stand. Unscrew the cap. The stand must be firm
and rigid , the legs , where possible , being pressed into the
ground, care being taken that the pressure is applied in such
a way as not to loosen or strain the screws round the head
or along the legs of the stand.
2. On hard or rocky ground the legs may be buried in
buckets, tins, &c. , filled with earth, and in order to secure
greater stability, a weight such as a sandbag may be suspended
from the anchoring hook. The weight should just touch the
ground, as it is thereby prevented from swinging or being
swayed by the wind.
The anchoring hook may also be used to secure the stand
to a tent peg or stake, either driven into , or buried in , the
ground immediately below it.
3. As the efficiency of the heliograph depends upon having a
firm base, care must be taken to set up the stand in as
sheltered a spot as possible , and it should whenever necessary
and practicable , be sheltered from the wind , using an
improvised screen of sandbags, stones , or anything else that
may be available. Whilst thus sheltering the stand , it must
be borne in mind that it must be clear of any object whose
shadow will fall on it during the course of the day ; the
necessity of moving, possibly at some critical moment, to a
fresh position, is thus obviated .
43. TO SET UP THE HELIOGRAPH.

1. Firmly grasp the heliograph placing the first and second
fingers of the left hand over the edge of the tangent box
against the base plate , one on each side of the vertical rod
and the thumb on the main socket screw.
2. Then draw the heliograph gently from the case and turn it
upwards, holding the case with the right hand .
3. Seize the jointed arm with the right hand ; lower it and
see that the gun-clip closes at the hinge.
4. Place the heliograph on the head of the stand and with-
out relaxing the grip of either hand, turn it so that the screw
of the main socket engages that on the head of the stand,
care being taken that the threads do not cross.
5. Screw the heliograph home on the stand by passing the
jointed arm from hand to hand ; the heliograph must not
be forced beyond the end of the screw, as the difficulty of
removing it from off the stand may result in the instrument
being damaged . See that the mirror is clean and free from
dust.
44. TO PUT THE TANGENT SCREW OUT OF GEAR.
Place both thumbs against the back of the tangent box, and
fingers of the right hand round the front of the base plate,
and the first two fingers of the left hand on the head of the
tangent screw. Draw back the head of the tangent screw,
taking care that the heliograph is not allowed to move until
the tangent screw is completely disengaged from the main
socket ; when the tangent spring is fully compressed the
heliograph may be freely moved horizontally as required .
Great care must be taken that the tangent screw is firmly
held back when moving the body of the heliograph or the
teeth on the main socket will be irremediably damaged .
s 45 . 77
45. To ALIGN THE HELIOGRAPH.
1. First, decide whether it will be necessary to use the
sighting rod or duplex mirror. The signaller should be able to
estimate roughly an angle of 90 degrees. By placing one
arm in the direction of the distant station and the other
in the direction of the sun , he should see whether the
angle thus formed is less or greater than90 degrees , and use
the sighting rod or duplex accordingly.
2. When there is any doubt the signaller should consider
whether the angle is being increased or decreased by the
apparent motion of the sun ; in the former case use the
duplex, and in the latter the sighting rod, and thus obviate
changing from one to the other after work has been
commenced.
46. WITH THE SIGHTING ROD.
1st Method.—
i . Turn the body of the heliograph until the signalling
mirror is roughly facing the distant station .
Unclamp and place the jointed arm in the direction
of the distant station . Elevate the mirror so that
the reflection of the distant station may be readily
seen. Place the sighting rod in the jointed arm.
ii. Stand just clear of the stand, with the back to the
distant station, and look into the mirror . Move the
head until the reflection of the distant station is
hidden by the unsilvered spot at the centre of the
mirror.
iii. Keeping the head still, move the jointed arm and
sighting rod so as to cause the reflection of the
sighting mark to cover the reflection of the distant
station. Clamp the jointed arm and sighting rod.
2nd Method.-
mirror is roughly facing the distant station.
Unclamp and place the jointed arm in the direction
of the distant station. Place the sighting rod in the
jointed arm.
1842 F
ii . From behind the heliograph, look through the hole in

the centre of the mirror frame , turning the body of
the heliograph, and moving the eye so that the dis-
tant station is readily seen in the centre of the
opening.
iii. By moving the jointed arm horizontally, and the
sighting rod vertically, bring the sighting mark into
alignment with the centre of the mirror and the
distant station ; then clamp the sighting rod and
jointed arm .
3rd Method.-
i . Place the sighting rod in the jointed arm and clamp
both conveniently , so that they and the signalling
mirror face the distant station .
ii. From behind the heliograph seize the two nearest legs
of the stand , and move them so as to bring the sight-
ing mark into the alignment as previously described
in the second method .
47. WITH THE DUPLEX MIRROR.

1st Method.—
mirror roughly faces the sun . Place the duplex
mirror in the jointed arm.
ii . Unclamp the jointed arm and place it so that the
angles of incidence and reflection at both mirrors
will be as small as possible ; for example, suppose
(in England or similar latitudes) the direction of the
distant station to be due north, then, although the
angle formed by the direction of the sun and that of
the distant station , will be the same at 10 a.m. and
at 2 p.m. , yet in the forenoon the jointed arm and
duplex mirror should be to the east of the signalling
mirror, whereas in the afternoon they should be in
the west. Exactly at noon , i.e. , when the sun and
distant station are in exactly opposite directions the
jointed arm may be placed on either side , but the
direction in which the sun appears to be travelling
79
s. 47. 79
should be considered , and the jointed arm placed so

as to obviate any necessity for re-aligning later in
the day . As a guide the following rule may be
adopted : -Stand in front of the heliograph exactly
facing the distant station, then , if the sun is on the
right hand, place the jointed arm to the right, if
the sun is on the left hand, place the jointed arm to
the left. The jointed arm should be kept as near as
possible to an imaginary line joining the sun and
signalling mirror, but it must be placed sufficiently
far to the side to prevent the duplex mirror R inter-
cepting the sun's rays from the signalling mirror B,
and to prevent the latter intercepting the light
reflected from the duplex mirror to the distant
station Z.
S
B
N
RE
When the jointed arm is in its correct position , tighten

the clamping screw.
iii. Elevate the signalling mirror slightly. Turn the
duplex mirror in the jointed arm roughly facing the
distant station . See that the U arms are no further
above the jointed arm than is necessary to allow the
clamping screw to turn . Adjust the clamping screw

and butterfly screw so that the duplex mirror moves
stiffly.
iv. Stand with the back to the sun and look into the sig-
nalling mirror, move the head until the reflection of
the sighting mark on the duplex mirror is hidden
by the unsilvered spot at the centre of the signalling
mirror.
v. Keeping the head still, hold the duplex mirror with
both hands, thumbs to the rear, first, second, and
third fingers to the front, the two former resting on
the rim of the duplex, the latter on its U arms.
Turn the mirror horizontally and vertically, until
the reflection of the distant station , as seen in the
signalling mirror, is exactly covered by the reflection
of the sighting mark.
vi. Tighten the clamping and butterfly screws, taking care
not to disturb the position of the duplex mirror.
2nd Method.-
ii. Proceed as in 1st method .

iii. Keep the mirror flush with the U arms .
iv. From behind the heliograph look through the hole in
the centre of the signalling mirror, turning the body
of the heliograph , and moving the eye so that the
sighting mark on the duplex mirror is readily seen
in the centre of the opening.
v. By moving the duplex horizontally and vertically,
cover the reflection of the distant station by the
sighting mark, then clamp the duplex as before
described .
The methods described above for aligning the heliograph
from the rear are useful when it is impossible to get in front,
as when working from behind a parapet, &c.
When using the duplex in a high wind , it will be found
difficult to read the signals owing to the vibration ; to over-
come this difficulty the jointed arm and duplex may be
s. 18. 81
removed and the signalling mirror of a second heliograph

substituted for it, the latter being on its own stand, which
should be placed close to the stand of the signalling helio-
graph. It will be necessary to affix a paper vane over the
unsilvered spot of the second heliograph.
48. VERIFYING THE ALIGNMENT.

1. After the heliograph has been aligned and the sighting
rod or duplex mirror clamped , the alignment should be verified .
This may be done by looking into the signalling mirror and
getting the three points (the centre , the reflections of the
sighting mark, and the distant station) covered as before ;
then if on moving the head and eye slightly to one side, the
three points appear to be in the same horizontal line, the
elevation is correct ; similarly, if on moving the head slightly
upwards, the three points appear to be in the same vertical
line, the direction is correct.
2. Directing the Light.- When the heliograph has been
aligned, the light is thrown on the distant station by turning
the signalling mirror so that the reflected light covers the
sighting vane and the shadow spot just covers the sighting
mark, the necessary adjustment of the signalling mirror
being made by the slow motion screws.
49. ALTERNATE METHOD OF ALIGNING .

The first methods described above , both in aligning with
the sighting rod and duplex, may be looked upon as the
deliberate method and should be learnt in detail, but as a
rapid practical method of aligning and verifying the align-
ment in one act , the following should also be practised.
50. WITH SIGHTING ROD.

Place the signalling mirror facing the distant station.
Look into the signalling mirror and move the head and
82 CHAP. II.--APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
jointed arm so that the distant station appears immediately

over the centre of the upper edge of the vane, and the
unsilvered spot appears to be in the same vertical line , thus-
DISTANT STATION.
SIGHTING
MARK .
UNSILVERED SPOT.
Clamp the jointed arm. Next move the head and sighting
rod until the distant station, sighting mark and unsilvered
spot all appear on the same horizontal line, thus-
clamp the sighting rod, taking care that the alignment is not
disturbed.
51. WITH THE DUPLEX .

Place the signalling mirror facing the sun ; stand in front
of the heliograph with the back to the sun and ascertain
whether the distant station appears on the right or left of
s. 52, 83
an imaginary line passing through the sun and heliograph

and move the jointed arm and duplex accordingly ; whilst so
doing keep the duplex roughly parallel to the signalling
mirror, as soon as the distant station can be seen over the
inner trunnions of the two mirrors, thus-
OBSERVERS DUPLEX .
EYE .
DISTANTSTATION.
SIGNALLING
MIRROR .
clamp the jointed arm and duplex (the latter so that it moves
stiffly). Look into the signalling mirror and move the head
and duplex so that the distant station , sighting mark and
unsilvered spot appear in the same vertical line ; then move
the head and duplex so that these three points appear in
the same horizontal line, as when using the sighting rod .
52. TO REGULATE THE BEAT .
Adjust the capstan screw so that the shadow spot falls
below the sighting mark to a point, such that when the key
is released, the light may not be visible to the distant
station ; at the same time the beat must be as short as
possible, so that there is no difficulty in always depressing
the key to the full length of the beat, and also to prevent the
instrument from being shaken unnecessarily. When the
beat is satisfactory, screw down the milled lock nut. As a
rule the spot should fall to inch below the mark on the
vane.
53. TO SIGNAL .
1. Hold the collar on the vertical socket with the first and
second fingers , one on either side of the vertical column , the
thumb on the side of the collar ; the head of the tangent
screw is to be held by the thumb and first finger of the other
hand. The key can then be used as described under the
" Dummy Key " ; at the same time constant attention must
be paid to the sighting vane to see that every time the key
is depressed the shadow spot just comes to its proper place,

i.e. , covering the sighting mark. With this object the
tangent screw and the collar must be turned very slowly and
continuously, without interrupting the sending.
2. The direction in which these slow motion screws should
be turned depends on the locality and the time of day, but it
should be remembered that, by means of them, the mirror
must always be made to follow the sun.
54. CALLS FOR LIGHT.
1. Directly the distant station calls for light, the signaller
will depress the key and look to the sighting vane, and if
necessary rectify the position of the shadow spot ; if the
shadow spot appears to be in the correct position and the call
is maintained, the heliograph should be re-aligned but as a
temporary measure, the slow motion screws may be turned
very slowly and immediately the distant station obscure their
light the signaller will release the key and at once cease
moving the slow motion screws and note the position the
shadow spot occupied at that moment. When signalling is
resumed, the screws must be adjusted so as to always bring
the shadow spot to this position.
2. Care should be taken that when answering a call for
light, the key is depressed to just the same extent as when
signalling, otherwise although a satisfactory light may have
been shown, the shadow spot when sending will be above or
below its proper position . The adjustment of the heliograph
must be performed with the greatest accuracy ; it is prefer-
able to have the alignment too low than too high, for the
reason that if too high, every time the collar is depressed the
light will pass through the distant station to a point above it,
and on the pressure being relaxed the light, during its return
to the position of rest , will again pass through the station ,
consequently each dash will appear as two dots, and the dots
will be broken up into a quivering light, and be very difficult
to read ; on the other hand if the light is set slightly too low
the distant station will not see the full light, but although
small , it will be steady.
s. 55. 85
55. SEARCHING FOR AN UNKNOWN STATION.
1. If the direction of the unknown station is roughly the

same as that of the sun, align the heliograph as nearly as
possible in the direction required, then slowly traverse the
body of the heliograph, at the same time turning the collar
and making a succession of dots . The country may be freely
swept, and the flash will be readily seen and answered ; an
accurate alignment may then be made . The duplex mirror
held in the hands by itself may also be used for this purpose.
2. If the direction of the unknown station is roughly
opposite to that of the sun , the heliograph should be roughly
aligned on its supposed position (with duplex mirror), the
spot should be brought on to the vane and the duplex mirror
then traversed slowly with the hands both horizontally and
vertically.
40 ...
56. WORKING UNDER COVER.
1. By directing the light from one heliograph on to a second
conveniently placed and with its mirror in the proper posi- f
tion , signals may be conveyed to the distant station without
exposing the signaller, the flashes being either thrown
through an embrasure or over the top of a parapet or other
cover.
2. Every time light is reflected its intensity is diminished ,
and therefore the position for the heliographs should be
chosen so that the light will not be reflected oftener than
necessary. To prevent loss of light the heliographs should
be set up as close together as possible, consistent with cover
being obtained for the signaller .
3. The method of setting up and aligning the heliograph will
be made clear by the following example : -Suppose AB to be
the crest line of a parapet, and suppose S and D to represent
the position of the sun and distant station respectively.
T
AN N
O I ST ATIO
T D ST .
P. Heliograph under cover.

Q. Heliograph raised so that it may be aligned on the
Distant Station .
s. 56. 87
i . First consider the positions of S and D and decide on

the approximate positions for the heliograph as at
P and Q, P being the signalling heliograph under
cover and Q the secondary heliograph , exposed .
ii. Align the heliograph at Q on the distant station , using
the sighting rod.
iii. Align the heliograph at P on the centre of that at Q ;
this must be done very accurately .
iv. Reflect the sun's rays from P on to Q , and keep the
light exposed.
A
B
v. Move to Q and find these rays after reflection from the
secondary heliograph ; turn the mirror of the latter
so that the shadow spot strikes the sighting mark.
Under certain conditions the light from the sun will
strike this heliograph directly ; in these cases care
must be taken that it is the light as reflected from
P and not that from the sun which is made to cover
the sighting vane.
Return to P, regulate the beat and proceed as usual.
4. By placing the eye level with the mirror at P and looking

into that at Q , answers and other signals made by the distant
station may be seen , or the duplex mirror may be used for
this purpose .
57. TO PACK UP THE HELIOGRAPH .
1. Remove the sighting rod or duplex mirror and place it in

the case, taking care that the latter is placed glass inwards
and with the butterfly screw flush with the frame.
2. The signalling mirror should be flush with the U arms , and
the vertical rod should not project beyond the German silver
ball. Should it do so , it must be lowered in the socket by
releasing the clamping screw, the mirror being again screwed
flush .
3. Unclamp the jointed arm and bring it to the right rear of
the mirror (the rear rib of the arm should pass midway
between the two screws on the right of the tangent box lid) .
Clamp the jointed arm securely to the main socket.
4. Grasp the stand, just below the head , with the left hand,
at the same time seize the jointed arm with the right, palm
upwards, and unscrew the heliograph a quarter of a circle to
the left.
5. Continue unscrewing the heliograph, passing the jointed
arm from hand to hand .
6. Holding the heliograph with both hands as when setting it
up, finish unscrewing it from the stand ; remove it and place
the left thumb on the main socket screw. Press the gun-clip
with the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, and double
up the jointed arm, and then hold the instrument upside
down in the left hand .
7. Holding the case with the right hand, place the helio-
graph gently in it with the left, taking care not to release
the grasp until it is entirely in the case. See that the clamp-
ing screw is flush with the jointed arm, turning it if
necessary .
s. 58. 89
8. Buckle the strap over the lid , replace the cap on the
stand and strap the legs together . When properly packed ,
the case should be perfectly flat .
58. CARE OF THE INSTRUMENT .
1. If riding or cycling, always carry the heliograph slung
across the shoulders and not attached to the saddle or cycle.
2. Never leave the heliograph on its stand when work with
it is finished. Replace the cap on the stand when not in use.
3. Avoid holding the instrument by the U arms or mirror
frame.
4. If the heliograph gets wet, rub the metal portions over
with an oily rag before putting it away or at the first
opportunity.
5. Always keep the heliograph clean and free from rust and
dust . Grit and dust in the tangent box, hinge of the jointed
arm or on the vertical rod and German silver ball, will soon
destroy the best instrument.
6. Occasionally oil the working parts (main socket and
body, tangent screw, bearings, &c.), but never leave super-
fluous oil on any part, as it collects dust. Never allow oil to
drop on the mirror.
7. Only make adjustments of the bearings , &c. , when neces-
sary. Be careful not to damage or burr the heads of screws ,
and see that the threads are not crossed .
8. Before commencing any minor repairs , consider by which
means the fewest screws and parts need be removed . Avoid
stripping the heliograph on ground where the parts would
be easily lost, such as long grass, &c. If possible spread a
blanket on which to work .
59. TO REPLACE A BROKEN MIRROR.
1. Slacken but do not remove the hexagon-headed screws of
the bearings on the U arms and claw. Remove the detachable
half of claw by unscrewing it from the rim of the mirror
frame . Remove the German silver ball and vertical rod from
other half of the claw by a slight pull . Remove the detach-

able portion of the U arm . Remove the mirror frame from
the body of the heliograph, and lay it glass downwards on a
flat surface. The above applies to the signalling mirror ; the
duplex can be replaced without removing the frame from
the U arms.
2. Mark the back and rim of mirror frame to facilitate adjust-
ment when replacing ; take out the small screws, remove the
back, and then unscrew two of the three fixing springs .
Insert the new mirror and assemble the parts in the reverse
order to above . See that the mirror is packed with the cork
strips so that it is concentric with the frame. When finished
align the heliograph carefully on some distant object, then
turn the slow motion screws for a short time ; if the mirror is
truly mounted the alignment will still be found correct.
60. TO REPLACE A BROKEN OR WEAK TANGENT SPRING.

Remove the lid of the tangent box , clean out the recesses ;
insert the new spring, seeing that the shank of the tangent
screw works freely in the bearing on the spring . Replace
the lid. As a temporary measure, pressing the head of the
tangent screw away from the signaller will assist it to engage
the teeth on the main socket .
61. TO ADJUST THE VERTICAL ROD SCREW.

Very slightly tighten the hexagon-headed screw in the
bottom of the German silver ball , thus closing in the threads.
62. TO REMOVE THE KEY SPRING .

1. Remove the mirror in its frame, from the body of the
instrument as previously described . Next remove the
bridge, and then turn the key and vertical column over to
the front ; the key spring can now be easily got at. Never
interfere with the tapered pins forming the pivots at the end
of the key , unless this is unavoidable .
s. 63 91
2. It must be remembered and impressed on all concerned ,

that the heliograph is not to be taken to pieces, unless
absolutely necessary ; the body should very rarely require to
be detached from the main socket ; but if it is found that it
fits badly, this may sometimes be remedied by adding a paper
washer of the required thickness to the brass washer under
the main socket-screw.
63. HELIOGRAPH, 5" (MARK IV) .
The construction and method of alignment of this helio-
graph differ from that of the “ Mark III ” as set forth in the
following sections :--
64. BODY OF THE HELIOGRAPH .
The tangent screw is incapable of being put out of gear,
therefore no quick lateral motion is obtainable . In cases
where the signalling mirror is required to be moved very
widely, it is quicker to replace the entire apparatus with the
stand in the required direction . The 66 capstan-headed
screw "" 66
is replaced by a beat regulating screw with a""
milled head. The " key " is longer than in the Mark III and
the " key-spring " is in a reversed position ; that part of the
spring which forces the key into the position of " rest " works
on the ""rear end of the key, just in front of the " key-
bridge.
All the hexagonal-headed screws have been replaced by
ordinary screws with split heads.
65. SIGHT ARM .
The " sight arm has no joint, therefore when packing
the instrument it is necessary to remove it . The " clamping
screw ‫ وو‬for fastening the " sight arm "" to the " main socket
is on one side .
66. VERTICAL COLUMN .
There is less threaded portion on the " vertical steel rod "
than in that of Mark III, as this is only used when effecting
a slight adjustment of the " shadow spot on the vane ;
therefore the smooth part is proportionately longer and thus

allows of a longer quick vertical motion. Both portions of
the " claw "" are removable. The pivoting pins of the front
and back 66 key bearings "" are very slightly tapered , and
have a plate at one end which is fastened in the former case
to the body " and in the latter to the " saddle " by small
screws. When adjusting or replacing a spring, it is only
necessary to remove the pin and draw back the key. "
67. MIRRORS .
The mirrors are secured in the frames by rims, which are
fitted into the front (the backs of the mirror frames not being
removable as in Mark III) : therefore when replacing a mirror
it is only necessary to lay it on the springs, whereas in
Mark III, it is essential to remove two of them. The V cut
on the frames and rims indicate the position in which these
rims must be placed .
68. SIGHTING RODS.
1. The "" sighting rods " are of two patterns, one being
straight with a circle of metal and cross wires at the top , and
the other similar in construction with the exception that it
has two joints which render it capable of being rapidly
elevated or depressed without unclamping the screw which
retains it in the " sight arm "; also if a lateral motion is
necessary, this sighting rod can be moved horizontally with-
out loosening the clamping screw of the " sight arm ." The
joints in the latter rod can be loosened or tightened by means
of the " adjusting tool."
2. In aligning this instrument, it must be remembered that
the point
"" onofthe
bisection of the cross
(6 sighting wires is equivalent to the
66 spot vane "" of Mark III , and so it is
necessary to move the rod laterally and vertically until the
distant station is cut by the intersection of them. There is
an enamelled vane on the upper part of the sighting rod
which must be turned down to admit of alignment, and when
turned up, enables the signaller to see that his light is
properly adjusted .
333
s. 69. 93
69. DUPLEX MIRROR.

In the " duplex mirror " there is a portion left unsilvered ,
on this a paper vane is fixed (on the back of the mirror) ,
which serves the double purpose of enabling the signaller to
effect an alignment and to see that his light is properly
adjusted .
70. CASE.
In the leather case , the heliograph, duplex mirror, sight-
ing rods, two spare mirrors in a separate aluminium box, a
small leather bag containing spare parts, and an "" adjusting
tool 29 are carried .
71. HELIOGRAPH . MARK IV .

A. Stand .
B. Anchoring hook. 66
C. Sight arm with clamping screws C'."
D. Tangent box with lid below.
E. Tangent screw head .
F. Key.
G. Key spring.
H. Key bridge.
I. Key bearings.
J. Beat regulating screw .
K. Lock nut for ditto .
L. Swivel joint.
M. Collar.
N. Vertical tubular socket .
O. Vertical steel rod .
P. Clamping screw for ditto .
Q. German silver ball attached to claw " Q'."
R. Adjusting screw for ditto .
S. Base plate.
T. U arms, with detachable portion " T " and screws
adjusting.
U. Signalling mirror in frame.
V. Unsilvered spot at centre of signalling mirror.
1842 G
W. Duplex mirror with frame in U Arms (T ) .

X. Sighting vane on ditto.
Y. Butterfly and pivoting screw.
Z. Sighting rods with movable vanes " Z'."
All Mark V heliographs in the future will have the clamp-
ing screw of the sight-arm at the back, as in Mark III ; in
addition, the vanes on the sighting rods and duplex mirrors
will have a thin black vertical line down their centres from the
66 ," and two horizontal lines . This will enable the sig-
spot,"
naller to judge the correct position for the " shadow spot
when the " signalling mirror " is in the " position of rest . "
-Q
...
V P
T
T
M
F
Z
8. 71. 95
0-
U
P-
N ..
Z- T -T
M
C -S
D
A-
P X
N
M
L
H
-c
‫لنا‬-
1
s. 72. 97
72. NOTES ON INSTRUCTION .
1. Instruction in the use of the heliograph should be

particularly thorough, and the signaller must be made to
carry out the details as explained in the foregoing para-
graphs. When these are mastered, signallers should be fre-
quently practised in getting the heliograph set on a given
point and commencing work in as short a time as possible .
2. When practising at short distances, the light will be found

excessive and too dazzling to read for long. At first, the
light may be reduced by covering the mirror frame with a
thin wood or cardboard disc, having a circular hole at its
centre of such a size as will expose as much mirror surface as
may be convenient ; with trained signallers this should be
unnecessary, but they should practise accommodating their
light to the requirements of the distant station by moving
the slow motion screws.
3. Great attention must be given to see that the signals are

made sharply and distinctly, as explained under the
66 Dummy Key. " The importance of always depressing the
key evenly and to its full extent can be impressed on learners,
by causing them to align the heliograph and send on to a spot
marked on a wall a short distance off. But above all , con-
stant attention must be paid to the sighting vane, so that the
light may not be allowed to wander, and for this reason the
habit should be acquired of looking constantly at the vane
and not at the distant station or mark representing it .
4. Signallers should be practised in aligning several helio-

graphs at short distances apart, on one another, as explained
for working under cover. Thus three heliographs may be
used, the first being aligned on the second, the second on the
third, and the third on the first. Signals made on the first
can then be simultaneously read off the third . This will
show the signaller faults in his sending , and is a check on the
correct alignment of the instrument .
98 CHAP. II .- APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
73. HELIOGRAPH AND SHUTTER.
1. The heliograph may be used in conjunction with a shutter
placed so as to intercept the reflected light which is kept fixed
in the direction of the distant station. The heliograph
should be aligned in the usual way, but there should be no
beat on the instrument ; the shutter (similar to that used
with lamps) is then placed on a separate stand, and set up so
that all the reflected light illuminates it.
2. The above method may prove useful when a heliograph is
damaged, or if from any cause signalling in the usual way is
rendered difficult by vibration of the instrument . The
signals are made as with lamps .
3. The above principles can be made use of when no proper
instruments are available by using an ordinary looking glass
and a book, piece of card, &c . , as a shutter . Two sighting
points, e.g. , wooden pegs , should be aligned on the distant
station, so as to enable the glass to be kept in the proper
position.
74. THE LIME-LIGHT.
1. This light is derived from a pencil of lime raised to a white

heat, by forcing a jet of oxygen gas through the flame of a
spirit lamp on to the end of the pencil.
2. The apparatus consists of the following parts (vide
Diagram).
A. The body of the lamp. K. Spring (of shutter).
B. Shutter. L. Burner .
C. Key. M. Conducting pipe for gas.
D. Spirit chamber. NN. Securing pins .
E. Sighting tube. O. Lamp tap.
F. Pencil holder. P. Gas tubing.
G. Stand . Q. Gas-bag tap and nozzle .
H. Lens. R. Gas-bag.
I. Perforated cap. S. Pressure bag.
J. Door. · T. Handle .
s. 74. 99
C-
K-
B -+-
N N
-E
D
M
0
G
O JM
N P
N
Q R
s. 74. 101
Q
A
0
H
F
B
0
D
N
G
3. The body of the lamp (A) has an opening in front to take

the carriage containing the lens arrangement for converging
the rays ; this consists of two similar plano-convex lenses,
each 3 inches in diameter, placed about half an inch apart,
with the convex surfaces towards one another it is
immaterial which end of the carriage is screwed into the
opening. There is a hole in the back of the lamp to receive
the pencil holder (F) , the lamp has also a perforated cap (N),
a hinged door (J), and a handle (T). When the lime-light is
in use, the handle must be turned downwards .
4. A detachable obscurating shutter (B), is fixed outside the
lamp by a bayonet joint ; it is worked by an ivory key (C) .
Two screw studs with mill-headed nuts are provided for the
attachment of the shutter, which is carried separately in a
leather case.
5. The spirit chamber (D) has a burner (L) in the middle for
a cotton or sponge wick. Along the top of it is fixed the
conducting pipe (M) , for the gas, projecting into the spirit
flame, and throwing the jet of gas on to the centre of the
lime pencil ; the gas-pipe is specially bored and bent for this
purpose, and its adjustment, which requires considerable
nicety, should be tested before issue and with careful use
should not require altering.
6. Two pins (NN), attached to chains hold the body of the
lamp securely to the top of the spirit chamber ; the sighting
tube (E) is fixed on to the latter.
7. The pencil holder (F) is a metal claw for holding the lime
pencil.
8. The stand (G) is that used with the heliograph.
9. The gas-bag (R) is made of dyed or tanned angola, and
measures when empty 30 inches in length , 12 inches in depth ,
and 19 inches in breadth, and will contain about 34 cubic
feet of oxygen gas, capable of burning for about 40 minutes,
or longer if the gas is economised . It has a tap and nozzle
(Q) , to the latter of which the tubing (P) is attached .
10. The pressure bag (S) is of canvas, and should have from
40 to 50 lbs . of earth or sand, not stones, put into it when
required for use.
s. 75. 103
11. The gas tubing (P) is of indiarubber, 8-inch internal

diameter, and is used to connect the gas-bag tap with the
conducting pipe passing outside the spirit chamber . The
cases containing it must, in hot climates, be kept full of
water or the tubing will spoil .
12. The copper wash-bottle is used for cleansing the gas of
impurities, by passing it through water before it finds its way
to the gas-bag.
It is provided with a brass cap, on the top of which is a
tube with two nozzles, marked respectively " in " and " out, "
to which are attached the gas tubing .
Connected with the cap is a tube, the end of which is
submerged when the bottle is half-filled with water and the
former screwed home.
13. The copper retort is provided with a cap and safety valve
to resist a pressure of 10 lbs .; if this is exceeded , the oxygen
gas escapes through the small holes on the top and sides of
the cap. The screw nozzle, projecting from the neck of the
retort, is for a brass tube 193 inches long, which is attached
during the manufacture of gas, and is for the purpose of con-
necting it with the elastic tubing, so that the latter may not
be injured by the fire.
75. THE LIME PENCIL .

The pencil is made from quicklime and is cut into pieces
-inch in diameter and 1ğ-inch in length . It should be of a
uniform white colour, free from spots. A heated pencil will
on no account be left in the lamp after use. When cool, the
pencil is removed from the holder, and placed at once in its
brass cylinder , so as to exclude all access of air, which causes
it to deteriorate, and to obviate the danger of fire in
buildings.
76. OXYGEN GAS, AND METHOD OF MAKING IT.

1. The oxygen gas is obtained from a mixture in the fol-
lowing proportion, viz.-
By Weight . By Measure.
Chlorate of potash ... 3 4
Granulated binoxide of manganese, 1 1
It may be prepared from chlorate of potash alone, but the
binoxide of manganese is added so that the gas may be given
off from the mixture at a lower temperature and with greater
rapidity. The ingredients must be well mixed .
2. Put 2 lbs . , or a pint and a half, of the above mixture into
the retort, which must be thoroughly clean and dry, and
screw the cap and brass tube tightly home, the retort must
not be more than full. (The gas from this quantity will
fill two bags). See that the wash-bottle, elastic tubing and
retort, are thoroughly clean , and that the safety valve of
the latter is working freely ; the two former must be blown
through to ensure that all is clear, and the wash-bottle half
filled with cold water.
3. Place the gas-bag with nozzle nearest the ground at a con-
venient distance from the fire on the windward side , open its
tap, and connect it by means of the tubing to the opening in
the wash-bottle, marked " out." Then attach a separate
piece to the one marked " in ." Place the retort on a slow
wood fire (if it is made too fierce or a coal fire used the retort
will be damaged) ; carefully watch the retort whilst the gas
is being made.
Shortly after it has been placed on the fire steam will be
given off, and in six to ten minutes the gas will commence to
come, which can easily be distinguished from the steam by
holding a piece of glowing wood to the tube of the retort,
when a brilliant flame will be produced .
After this result has been obtained , connect the wash-bottle
and retort by the tubing previously mentioned . The gas will
now pass through the wash-bottle to the bag : if it comes too
freely, which can be detected by a loud and continuous
bubbling in the wash-bottle, the retort must be taken off the
fire, put in a warm position near it, and replaced when
necessary .
4. While the process of filling the bag is going on, if others
are to be inflated they will be laid out flat, so that the tubing
s. 77. 105
can be quickly transferred to them as required . When filled

turn off the gas-bag tap .
5. After the gas is made, and the retort has been removed
from the fire, the tubing connecting the wash-bottle and
retort must be removed, or else as the mixture in the retort
cools , water from the wash-bottle might be sucked into the
retort.
77. To CLEAN THE RETORT .

1. After making the gas the retort must be removed from
the fire and allowed to cool slowly. It must on no account be
plunged into cold water. The caked residue left in it con-
sists of a mixture of chloride of potassium and binoxide of
manganese, which can be dissolved by pouring water, hot if
possible, into it, and afterwards removed by scraping it with
a piece of wood, as iron or steel if employed would cause
injury to it. No other method , such as hammering the
mouth of the retort on the ground or against a stone, must
be adopted , or the threads at its head will be injured and
the cap will not fit. The retort will then be placed before the
fire to dry.
2. The safety valve should from time to time be taken to
pieces and the spring cleaned .
78. TO TRIM THE LAMP.

1. Remove the body of the lamp from the spirit chamber by
taking out the pins which secure it, and lifting it off.
2. Unpin the gas-pipe and take it off.
3. Take about 7 inches length of cotton wick, sufficiently
thick to well fill the holder. This will generally consist of from
26 to 30 strands, according to the thickness of the thread . Tie
the ends with a piece of string or spare strand of wick , and
put the latter into the holder, next extract the string or
strand with a hooked wire inserted in the spirit chamber,
and press the string or strand downwards, at the same time
pulling it with the left hand , and when sufficiently through
cut off the string and re-insert into the chamber the ends of
the wick to which it was attached .
The strands should not be twisted, in order that the methy-
lated spirits may be allowed to pass freely through them .
If the wick is too thin, jolting in transport will cause it to
drop down the holder into the chamber, and it then takes
considerable time to extract it therefrom ; if too thick the
methylated spirits cannot pass freely and the wick becomes
charred .
4. Next cut the wick nearly flush with the top of the holder,
leaving a few strands projecting inch, just where the gas-
pipe enters the holder. Re-fix the gas-pipe, bedding the
nozzle in the projecting strands of wick, so that it may be
wrapped in flame when the spirit is lighted . Now press the
strands in front of the nozzle , right and left of the orifice ,
forming a free channel for the passage of the gas. It is
important that these points should be carefully attended to,
as any slight obstruction to the jet of gas, or excess of flame,
will mar the light .
5. Fill the spirit chamber three parts full with methylated
spirit (i.e., about one pint). This amount will last about two
and a half hours.
6. Replace the body of the lamp on to the spirit chamber,
taking care that the oxygen jet points towards the line pencil
holder, and secure with the two pins.
79. TO OBTAIN THE LIght.
1. Connect the gas-bag by a piece of indiarubber tubing to
the conducting pipe in front of the spirit chamber .
2. Place the pressure bag on top of the gas-bag.
3. Light the spirit lamp. If the wind renders this difficult
slightly turn on the gas, but only till the lamp catches, or the
pencil when inserted will crack.
4. Place a lime pencil in the holder, the end next to the
lens having been cut or rubbed flat at right angles to the
longer axis of the pencil ; put the pencil in position, and allow
it to heat in the spirit flame for a short time.
B. 80. 107
5. Open the tap of the gas-bag.

6. Turn on the lamp tap slowly, and adjust the lime-pencil
by moving the holder backwards or forwards , by a twisting
motion, till the jet of gas impinges on the end of the lime
pencil, and regulate its supply, until just sufficient gas passes
to raise the end of the pencil to a white heat.
7. The intensity of light depends on the exact proportion of
the two gases in the flame that is brought to bear on, and
completely cover, the end of the pencil. In making this
adjustment the signaller will hold a book or paper about
8 inches in front of the lens . If the upper part of the image
as now seen is dark, and the lower bright, the pencil is too
far back. If the reverse is the case, the pencil is too far for-
ward. If it is found impossible to get a good light by any
adjustment of the pencil and the supply of oxygen gas, the
fault probably lies in the spirit flame , there is either too much
or too little, i.e. , the wick is too high or too low. Care must
be taken not to have too much flame.
8. When everything is in order, the end of the pencil should
be about 1-10-inch in rear of the centre of the wick, no flame
should strike against the chimney, and the image as seen
above should be a disc of bright light of uniform intensity,
without a shadow or spot.
80. To FoCUS THE LENS .
To ensure the greatest amount of light reaching the distant

station, adjust the lens so as to bring it into proper focus.
This is done by placing any object about 18 feet in front of
the lamp, and turning the carriage containing the lens , until
a circle of light, from 22 to 24 inches in diameter , is obtained .
81. TO MAINTAIN THE LIGHT.
To maintain a good light when signalling, constant atten-

tion must be paid to the lime pencil. First, to see that it is
kept in a proper position with relation to the oxygen jet, and

secondly, to watch whether it is cracking, if so , it generally
crumbles away and must be replaced by a new pencil . The
supply of gas must be carefully regulated , and economised as
much as possible. During a cessation of signalling, the
lamp tap will be turned off, and then the pressure bag
removed . When it is required to resume work the latter will
be placed on the gas-bag before turning on the lamp tap .
82. RANGE.
The range of the light varies according to the conditions of

the atmosphere from 10 to 15 miles in England .
83. ALIGNING THE LAMP .
The direction of the distant station should be fixed by day,

by means of 3 pickets whose tops must be in an exact line
between the proposed position the lamp will occupy at night
and the distant station . When a spare stand is available
and the weather allows, the opening of night work will be
facilitated by aligning the lamp by day on the distant
station's heliograph. This however must not take the place
of aligning pickets as described above as the lamp may be
shifted accidentally and the pickets further ensure the
means of resetting the lamp in the event of having to turn
the light temporarily in another direction during night
work. To align the lamp by means of the sighting tube
which is fixed to the top of the spirit chamber, the signaller
looks through the pin hole at the rear end, and turns the
lamp until the distant light is brought fully into the field of
the tube, or by getting the other station's light into the
centre of his own beam. Care must be taken that once a
lamp has been laid on a distant station its alignment is kept
unaltered .
s. 84. 109
84. THE BEGBIE LAMP .
LAMP, SIGNALLING , " B."
General Description .
1. This is an oil lamp in which the light is concentrated by
a 6-inch lens (bullseye).
2. It is fitted with a screw to secure it to the stand , which
is the same as that used with the heliograph and lime-light
lamp .
3. A flat wick is used in a circular burner, and its height is
regulated by a pinion which passes through an opening in the
back of the lamp.
4. The reservoir holds & pint of kerosene oil, which will burn
for about 10 hours. Openings in the body of the lamp
covered by wire gauze serve as ventilators . One of these may
be used to write by.
5. A metal chimney, one spare spring and a wooden fork
are carried inside the lamp.
6. A shutter is fixed inside the lamp in front of the flame.
It is worked by a button on the outside of the lamp .
7. The cowl stack and cowl (attached to the lamp by a chain)
are removable. When the lamp is used they are put into
position and protect the flame from wind, but when the lamp
is not in use the cowl stack is removed and placed inside the
lamp by being reversed . It fits round the felt jacket cover-
ing of the glass chimney, which is always kept on the burner.
The cowl in this case is put in the proper lower end of the
cowl stack .
8. Two spare glass chimneys in felt jackets are also carried
inside the lamp, by being placed between the shutter and the
lens . An oil can to hold two pints of oil, a pair of scissors ,
and a wooden case to hold six glass chimneys, packed with
cotton waste and spare wick , are also fitted inside the box,
provided for each lamp , weight of lamp complete 14 lbs . , of
box 14 lbs. , range of lamp at home about 5 to 7 miles .
1842 H
CHAP. II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.
110
LAMP SIGNALLING , B
s. 85. 111
85. TO TRIM THE LAMP.
1. Remove the cowl, and take hold of the lower edge of the
felt jacket with the left hand, and lift out the cowl stack
with the right hand with care, for as a rule the glass chimney
with its felt jacket comes up with the cowl stack . Raise the
felt jacket until it clears the glass chimney, and remove it ,
then take out the chimney itself.
2. Raise the latch at the back of the lamp, and take out
the reservoir.
3. Unscrew the burner, see that it, the reservoir and wick, are
thoroughly clean . Fill the reservoir with kerosene ; be care-
ful always to use oil with a flashing point of 150°, as it gives
the best light . Turn up the wick until about an inch only
projects below the burner, then screw the burner into the
reservoir, when in correct position the pinion head should be
at right angles to the reservoir.
Care should be taken to turn up the wick through the
burner before screwing it in, for if the whole of the wick is
below it gets so twisted from the action of turning, that it
becomes very difficult afterwards to raise the wick evenly ,
and impedes the oil rising from the reservoir.
4. Having screwed in the burner , turn down the wick, pick off
with the thumb and forefinger any charred portion, and rub
it with the finger or a bit of wood , quite even with the top
of the burner. Never cut the wick unless absolutely neces-
sary. If a new wick is required it should be inserted dry,
and should not exceed six inches in length.
5. Any kerosene found on the outside of the burner or
reservoir must be removed.
6. Now place the reservoir in position, let down the latch,
put on the glass chimney, and add the metal chimney.
7. Next put the cowl stack into its place, and drop the
cowl into the top , taking care that they fit properly.
8. The bearings of the shutter should be kept well oiled and
free from rust and dirt ; a mixture of rangoon and kerosene
oil is a good lubricant.
86. TO LIGHT THE LAMP.
1. Turn up the wick slightly.

2. Lift the glass chimney straight up with the thumb and
finger of the left hand, until it just clears the top of the
gallery, then apply, with the right hand, a match to the wick
and replace the chimney ; if the chimney is too hot to be
lifted up by the fingers, it should be done by aid of the
wooden fork which is made so as to fit the choke of the glass
chimney .
3. Take special care that the chimney is pressed down, and
that it rests evenly in its gallery, any air space at the bottom
of the chimney will have the effect of destroying the white-
ness of the flame.
4. Close the door and keep the flame low for a few minutes,
after which the wick can be turned up a little .
The maximum light is obtained when the flame reaches the
lower edge of the metal chimney. Take special care that the
lamp does not smoke.
Should the flame be " spiked " it is evident that the edge
of the wick is not even. As this 66' spiking " will prevent a
proper cone of flame being secured, the lamp should be
extinguished , and the wick rubbed down quite evenly.
5. If the night is windy, the door and air guards must be
kept quite closed ; but if it is still and close, both should be
opened. It may even be advisable to remove the cowl. A
mineral oil flame requires all the air one can give it, but it
cannot stand wind. The supply of air, therefore , must be
regulated according to the weather. In damp weather, wipe
the glass chimney quite dry inside and outside before light-
ing the lamp . If there is moisture in the choke of the
chimney, the glass is likely to crack when heated by the
flame.
6. When using the lamp , the charred wick should be
occasionally removed , or the flame will be affected .
s. 87. 113
87. To EXTINGUISH AND PACK UP THE LAMP.

1. Extinguish the lamp by turning the wick down until
only a small blue flame appears . Let this remain for a
minute or two and it will die out.
2. Unscrew the lamp from the stand .
3. Lift off the metal chimney, taking hold of it by means of
cotton waste, a small quantity of which should always be
carried for this purpose, as well as for cleaning , in each lamp .
Put the metal chimney into its holder. Allow the glass
chimney to cool and then put on the felt jacket.
4. Next remove the cowl and reverse the cowl stack ,
dropping it into position over the felt jacket, and put the
cowl in the base of the cowl stack . Be careful always to
keep the felt jacket on the glass chimney when the lamp is
not in use.
5. If the lamp has only to be taken for a few miles , it is
easily carried in the hand , but for long journeys it should
invariably be packed in its case.
88. To ALIGN THE LAMP .

1. If the stations are very far apart, the lamp should be
aligned during daylight, as it is a difficult matter to aim on
the distant light after darkness has set in . This precaution
is not necessary if the range is moderate. The lamp is
aligned by looking through the sighting tube and bringing
the cross wires to bear on the distant station . If the lamp is
on a stand, the adjustment is obtained by moving the legs .
2. If the signaller receives intimation that his light is not
bright, he should first look to see if the wick is sufficiently
turned up, the lens , glass chimney, &c. , are clean . If, how-
ever, the lamp itself is correct, he should traverse the lamp ,
slowly altering the elevation each time. He should, as soon
as the distant station shuts off his light, keep the lamp in the
position it occupied at that moment.
3. It will be found an assistance sometimes, when working
at long ranges , to place a flag pole or a couple of stones on
the ground in the alignment, as these will show the position
of the distant station, should the position of the lamp have

been accidentally disturbed . The method laid down in
Section 83 for aligning the lime light with pickets , &c . , is
equally applicable to the Begbie.
89. TO SIGNAL WITH THE LAMP .
1. The shutter is worked in the same manner as the dummy
key.
2. Care should be taken that the shutter is fully opened for
dots as well as dashes . Some signallers have a tendency to
cut the dots too short, but this should be carefully guarded
against.
3. The diagram on the box illustrates the method of
arranging four lamps for transport on a pack animal, two on
each side.
90. TELESCOPES AND BINOCULARS .

1. These instruments are used for viewing distant objects ,
which with their aid appear to be brought nearer the observer
and magnified .
2. As regards signalling, telescopes are as a rule to be
preferred for reading, owing to their higher power and
greater steadiness .
3. Binoculars on the other hand, owing to their greater
field of view and handiness are of more use when sweeping
the country in search of a signalling party, or when selecting
positions for stations , to be afterwards more closely examined
with the telescope .
91. TELESCOPE, SIGNALLING . (MARK II . )

1. The telescope when closed is 11 inches long ; it consists
of an outer tube covered with leather and three draws . The
lens at the larger end of the telescope is known as the "object
glass, " it consists of two pieces of glass fitted together . The
other lenses are all mounted in the smallest or 66 first draw.
The short interior tube at the end of the first "' draw
nearest the eye- which contains two lenses , the " eye lens "
THE
JOHN CRERAR
LIBRARY
reater cup, auWO numna OTTA ww

To face page
JOHN KINK
LIBRARY
QBJE
TX F
4115 WT 2170-517. 15.4/10
rest the eye- which contains two lenses, the

s. 92. 115
and the field lens "-is called the " eye piece . ' Two eye
66 esher
piec are"" supplied(( called , resp""ectively the lower " and the
hig power eye-piece . When the lower power eye-
piece is used , the distant object appears to be magnified 15
times , with the higher power the magnification is increased
to 30 times ; the two eye-pieces are marked L and H,
respectively .
2. As the telescope not only magnifies the distant object
but everything else within its field of view as well, it will be
understood, that although the distant object may be highly
magnified , it will probably be more difficult to discern owing
to the corresponding high magnification of particles of dust ,
moisture, &c. , in the air. The lower power eye-piece is there-
fore provided for general use and the higher is reserved for
particularly favourable weather, or in countries where the
atmosphere is abnormally clear.
3. The telescope when closed is protected by leather caps,
and is provided with a shoulder strap which passes through
fairways on the caps and the separate case for the alternate
lenses. Great care must be taken not to bend the draws or
scratch the lenses. The telescope should never be taken to
pieces, unless absolutely necessary.
92. TELESCOPE STAND.

1. The stand consists of three legs connected to a head , which
is capable of being moved horizontally. This head has two
hinged lugs, between which are connected a pair of grips and
a " V" shaped spring . A clamping screw passing through
the bottom of the grips holds the telescope at the point of
balance . The grips may be moved so that the horizontal
and vertical movements allow the telescope to be set in any
direction .
2. When not in use a circular block of wood (which is attached
to the stand by a cord) is kept in the grips to prevent the
latter being injured during transit, &c. A canvas sling with
leather ends , one being a loop, the other attached to a
leather cup, allows the stand to be slung across the back .
93. To FOCUS THE TELESCOPE.
The telescope must be focussed to suit the eyesight of the
individual signaller who is going to use it. Unbuckle the
caps and draw them gently off. Draw out the tubes of the
telescope with a twisting motion to their full extent . Turn
aside the shutter, covering the end of the eye- piece. Hold
the telescope to the eye and direct it on any distant object,
then by a twisting motion push in the draw nearest the eye
only, until the image of the distant object appears sharp and
clear. If the eye is kept long at the telescope when not
focussed, it soon gets tired, and therefore the focussing should
be done quickly.
94. TO SET UP AND ALIGN THE TELESCOPE.
1. It is important, more especially when the pressure of work
is great that the reader at the telescope be as comfortable as
circumstances will permit . For this reason he should either
lie prone (preferably slightly up hill) or sit with his back
against a rock or some such support, or stand against a
parapet or wall. This should be borne in mind when choos-
ing the position for the stand, which should be set up so as
to bring the telescope to a convenient height with regard to
the reader's eye.
2. The telescope is now roughly directed on the distant
station by looking along the top of it. Next, place the eye to
the eye-piece, and move the telescope with one hand so as to
bring the distant object into the centre of the field of view ;
the other hand should be on the screw, ready to tighten it as
soon as the object is seen satisfactorily.
95. USING THE TELESCOPE .
For continued observation both eyes should be kept open
as it is much less tiring than when the disengaged eye is
shut . But if it is desired to see an object as clearly as
possible, it is generally found necessary to shut one eye or
preferably to cover it with the open hand or a book, etc.
The reader should be as comfortable as possible, and the
s. 96. 117
muscles, particularly of the face and back of the neck, should

not be strained . The hands should be used to screen out the
exterior light from the eyes. In bad or windy weather,
dazzling light, or excessive heat, the telescope and observer's
head should be screened with a cloak or blanket to shut out
distracting influences and external light, and the sliding tube
should be drawn out to screen the object glass.
96. BINOCULARS OR FIELD-GLASS.
The service field-glass consists of two telescopes , one for
each eye, mounted together on a light metal frame. It is
made in three sizes , wide, medium and narrow ; this refers to
the distance between the eye-pieces, and is provided to suit
different individuals. The power of all three sizes is the
same, viz. , a magnification of five times . The field-glass is
focussed by a rack and screw which moves both eye-pieces
simultaneously. It is carried in a leather case which is large
enough to take it ready focussed .
97. CARE OF TELESCOPES AND BINOCULARS .
1. Never use undue force in opening and closing the tubes.
2. Avoid closing the tubes when wet ; they should be
rubbed occasionally with a greasy rag and afterwards wiped
clean. Oil must not be left on the tubes.
3. Always replace the caps on the telescope or place the
binoculars in their case, after use.
4. Never take the instruments to pieces unless absolutely
necessary in order to clean the lenses.
5. Before doing above, spread a blanket or towel to catch
any part which may be dropped .
6. Never take more than one lens out at a time ; as soon as
it is cleaned, replace it , taking care that it is put back
exactly as before.
7. If there is a little dust only on the lens, remove it with a
sharp puff of breath and then dry by moving the lens briskly
backwards and forwards . If necessary it may be wiped with
clean soft chamois leather or silk handkerchief. Wiping even
118 CHAP. III. SIGNAL STATIONS .
with the softest and cleanest material impairs the polish and
must only be done when absolutely necessary . A very dirty
lens may be cleaned by putting two or three drops of spirit
on it. The lens must never be rubbed with the bare finger.
8. The interior of the tubes are purposely blackened and
must not be interfered with .
9. Great care must be taken when replacing the tubes or
substituting one eye-piece for the other, that the threads of
the screws do not cross , as they are necessarily thin and easily
damaged.
10. The telescope must always be carried or packed in such
a way that the tubes cannot be dented or bruised .
11. The telescope when in the stand should be supported at
the point of balance .
98 . BUZZER.
The " Buzzer " is a part of the field telephone (see Chapter
XIII). When, owing to faults in the line or other causes, it
is not possible to speak through the telephone, it is often
possible to work the " Buzzer," and thus to transmit
messages by the morse code.
CHAPTER III .
SIGNAL STATIONS .
99. NAMES OF STATIONS.

1. When certain places in the theatre of operations have to
keep up communication with one another by signalling for
more or less definite periods of time , the parties of signallers
detailed for this duty form Fixed or Permanent Stations.
The use of such stations is generally limited to the lines of
communication or to connect points of strategical or tactical
importance.
s. 100. 119
2. Signallers accompanying the fighting portions of the force

form Moving Stations ; under this heading would be included
signallers with advanced , rear and flank guards , escorts , out-
posts (other than permanent), reconnoitring parties, mobile
columns, and other duties of a like nature.
3. The following instructions are laid down for Fixed or
Permanent Stations and points of difference between the
procedure for these and Moving Stations are indicated .
4. Stations are also known as Terminal, Transmitting or
Central.
100. TERMINAL STATIONS .
1. When the two places which have to be put into communica-
tion are visible to one another, and are within the range of
the available apparatus, a Terminal Station at each point is
all that is necessary . These stations are called Sending or
Receiving Terminals according to the direction of each
message.
2. The full complement of signallers required for a terminal
station is three men ; this number should if possible be
detailed when the telescope has to be employed , in bad
weather and when there is a likelihood of much work. With
well trained men when the heliograph or lamp only is
required , and at distances not necessitating the use of the
telescope two men should be found sufficient.
3. The signallers at a sending terminal will perform the
-:
following duties :
" Caller " takes charge of the form and calls out, each
"" word or group of the message to
Sender," who pays attention to the heliograph lamp
or flag and sends each word or group as ordered
but waits for
" Answer Reader, " to report each word as being answered
before he (i.e. the sender) , proceeds to send the
next.
-.
Similarly at"" a receiving terminal :-
66 Reader (at the telescope) reads each letter numeral
or sign saying " group " on the conclusion of each
word, &c. , to
120 CHAP. III.- SIGNAL STATIONS .
""
Writer," who writes each word, group of numerals,
numeral or sign which forms part of the message
as read, on a form , and if satisfied with each word
or group orders
66 Answerer "" (with flag , lamp or heliograph) to send the
answer or any check letters or other signs as
required.
4. When less than three men are employed some of the above
duties must be combined as may be found most convenient .
For example at short distances a sender or caller can read
answers in addition to his own duties, or again at a receiving
station the duties of reader and answerer may be combined
provided the telescope is not being used .
101. TRANSMITTING STATIONS.

1. When two places, owing to their not being visible to one
another or the distance between them being too great, cannot
be connected by terminal stations alone, intermediate points
are occupied and form transmitting stations. As the duties
are a combination of those of a receiving and a sending
terminal , six men will be the full complement for a trans-
mitting station.
2. The message may be either (a) transmitted word by word
as received, or (b) received and handed over to the sending
portion of the station, either in its entirety or in parts.
Generally speaking, in the former case, the combined duties
of writer and caller would be performed by one man ; import-
ant messages should, when possible, be so dealt with, but
which system is employed will depend on the circumstances
of each case ; for example if both portions of the station can
communicate with their respective distant stations from the
same point and the message is of considerable length, the
first system should be employed as the second would obviously
cause much time to be wasted ; on the other hand, when the
work consists of a number of short messages going and coming
in both directions, it will be found advisable to adopt the
second system ; and this might also be necessary on account
s. 102 . 121
of the configuration of the ground making it impossible to

maintain communication with both places from one and the
same point. In such cases when a particularly long message is
being dealt with, it should be handed over in parts from the
receiving to the sending portion , a convenient division being
after each form is completed . If it becomes necessary to
separate the two portions of the station by a considerable dis-
tance, it will generally be found advantageous for them to
work independently of one another, and to make provision for
the messages being exchanged when necessary by a system
of orderlies.
3. Just as the duties at a terminal station can be combined ,
so , under like circumstances, can those at a transmitting
station .
102. RELAY.
When a wood, river or other natural obstacle necessitates
the introduction of an extra transmitting station into the
chain, the number of men employed at the stations on either
side of the obstacle will depend on the method of bridging it ;
for example , with a wood intervening, a short length of cable
or telephone might be used ; in this case one operator at each
end in addition to a terminal station would be found suffi-
cient. Or again, the semaphore system might be employed
to connect two transmitting stations at opposite edges of an
intervening plateau ; here two men at each station in addi-
tion to a terminal station would be required . Any such
arrangement as above described is termed a " relay."
103. CENTRAL STATIONS .

These are necessary when communication has to be kept up
in several different directions or with a number of distant
stations ; when available a full terminal should be detailed to
work with each of the distant points ; these terminals should
be as close together as possible provided their lights or flags
do not interfere with one another, so that, if necessary, any
two of them may be combined to form a transmitting station .
122 CHAP. III.- SIGNAL STATIONS.
104. DETAILING SIGNALLERS TO STATIONS .
1. The general principle to be borne in mind when detailing
signallers, is that as few men as possible should be employed
consistently with the work being carried on efficiently and
without loss of time. Generally speaking it is inadvisable to
detail less than two men for a terminal or four for a trans-
mitting station. When the heliograph or lamp is being used
and telescopes are not required , one experienced signaller
alone can perform all the duties of a sending terminal effi-
ciently, and occasions may arise when a signaller must be sent
out singly ; the work must then be conducted at such a speed
as will allow him to perform all the duties required . (Vide
also DD, DD signal page 127.)
2. The non-commissioned officer or signaller in charge of
the station will generally perform the duty of caller or
writer.
3. In the above the question of reliefs has not been taken
into consideration . The number of men available, the
number of stations to be maintained and the probable amount
of work must be considered in determining how and when
these can best be effected .
105. PRACTICE.
Every signaller will be trained to perform all the different
duties required at the various classes of station . Transmitting
messages word by word should receive special attention , each
man taking his turn at the different duties.
106. FIELD SERVICE .
On active service the duties will be allotted according to
the various capabilities of the individual signallers available .
107. STATION CALLS .
1. To enable one station to attract the attention of any
other for whom it may have a message, all stations will be
allotted a distinguishing " call ," consisting of two letters , or
rarely three.
s. 108. 123
2. For fixed stations these should indicate as far as possible
the names of places occupied ; thus the signalling station at
Newcastle might be given the call NC, or that at Britstown
BT.
3. Similarly all parties of signallers attached to, or accom-
panying the various staffs , departments, patrols, outposts ,
etc. , should be allotted calls which as far as possible indicate
the same , thus --
:-
Signallers at General Headquarters , HQ .
Signallers at Army Headquarters , 1st Army, AHQ .
Signallers at Army Headquarters , 2nd Army, BHQ.
Signallers with Staff of 1st Division, AD.
Signallers with Staff of 2nd Division , BD.
Signallers with Right, Centre and Left Patrols, RP, CP,
LP.
Signallers with G.O.C. Royal Artillery , RA.
Signallers with a line of picquets , PA, PB, PC.
Regimental Signallers Royal Scots , RS .
4. In allotting these calls, care should be taken that
66 none are
used which can lead to any confusion , thus Reading
should not be given RD. for its call , this signal being used to
intimate that a message has been correctly read .
5. These calls should be allotted by the signal officer in
charge. They should be made known to all concerned and
should be changed as seldom as possible.
108 . CALLING UP.

1. When a station has a message for another and is not
already in communication with it, it will send the call of the
station required , repeating it as often as may be necessary.
As soon as the distant station perceives it is being called
it will answer by sending its own call once . Thus if Dover,
whose call is DV , wants to communicate with Canterbury ,
whose call is CR, Dover will send CR, CR, CR. CR..
As soon as Canterbury see this, they will send CR, followed
by " G " to indicate that they are ready to receive the
124 CHAP. III.-SIGNAL STATIONS.
message, which Dover will at once proceed to send, or, if
delay is unavoidable, Canterbury will send " MQ," meaning
" wait."
2. In the event of a station wishing to attract the attention
of a party of signallers whose call is not known to them, they
will do so by signalling the " preparative," i.e., a succession
of dots ; this will be answered by the unknown station with
the general answer (one dash) . The original station will
then send RU, (vide page 127 ) , meaning " Who are you ?"
This will be acknowledged with the general answer by the
unknown station, who will now send their call and name, and
thus ensure the message being sent to its proper destination .
3. Once communication has been established , any further
calling up is an unnecessary waste of time, and is generally
the result of inattention .
109. STATION SIGNALS .

To assist in the smooth working of stations the following
signals should be used when necessary . They will be sent
without any preliminary signal (excepting the signal RU, and
in the midle of a message the stop signal, vide page 172) , and
must be complied with at once whenever possible. They will
each be signalled in one group .
.
SIGNA
STATI LS
ON
.
INSTRUCTION .
SIGNAL HOW
.
ANSWERED .
REMARKS
.Distanc
Short
Station
Distan
the
at
Signallter es
Tmove
a
)( o
anothe
one
facing
are
.station
the
that
assump
on
made
are s
rtion
signals
These
answer hen
,tgeneral
the
By the
sending
station
as
soon
As
the
in
slowly
very
moving iwill
,t
answer
the
sees
signal
1.
right Ꭱ
your
to
Move flag he
(tdirection
required rthe
"ateady
flag
hold
left
your
to
Move
2. the and
exposed
light
the
keep
or
at
carried
being signaller
distant
higher
Move
3.
up
or same
the
)a"teady
rtime the
watch
off
.
further distant
the
watching reaches
as
soon
ahe
moving
;will s
or
down
lower
Move
4. at
halting
, nd
astation daash
position
desired
the
RIH O
.
in
closer amake
it
seeing
on
once obscured
light
the
or
made
.be
light
.its
obscure it
used
being
is
lamp
the
If
s.109
or
dash distance
hort
samoved
be
will
cases
such
in
, ut
breset
and
saved
be
probably
would
. time ons
instructi
fuller
sending
by
Flags
R
b
)(. egarding
, hen
tanswer
general
the
By dis-
the
of
waves
when
Used
5.
flags
Separate SF as
halting of
those
cut
flag
station's
tant
and
moving ithus
,to
tclose
.
above flag
another
.
discern
to
difficult
it
making
,then
answer
general
the used
be
will
flag
small
or
Large
blue
Use
6.
flag BF By
white
Use
7.
flag WF order
.the
with
complyin g .required
as
125
STATION
SIGNALS
c
.-ontinued
126
.INSTRUCTION SIGNAL
. How
ANSWERE
. D REMAR
. KS
R(c) egarding
Lamps
Heliographs
.and
Open
light
8. OL general
the
tanswer
,By hen Used
when
station
keeping
light
the
steadily awants
mark
on
which
set
to
light
its
exposed
or
absence
the
in accura
.Tbehis tely
sun
of
holding
flag
the
at necess
blamp
(a)the may
ecausary
rthe
."Weady
hen e
distant
light or
been
has
heliograph
moved
satisfactory
is accide
w
(b); hen ntally
chang-
station
the
will
obscure ing
from
sighti
vane
to duplexng
their
light
make
dor
aash vice
versaor
obeing
c);(towing
meaning
"Your
light contin
called
for
,alight nd ually
."
correct is
it
theref
advisa
to ble ore
Calling
for
.W
9. hen re
the
.instr
-align ument
distant
the
station's
becomes
light The
freque
use nt
of
this
signal
bad
too
indistinct
or
be
to
twith
,read
ease
hey
will can
only
necess
be
a)b( y itated
called
light
for
dots
aof
by uccession
sfollowed
teady faulty
heliog
lamp
exposure
light
or
held
flag
ofeady
orthe
";at n b)(or y raph
seeing
this
signal
they the
sendepaying
attent
not rion
will
once
at
expose
their
light
own sighti
his
to
vane
lime
or ng
slowly
and
traverse
lamp
adjust
or
shadow
the
of
spot pencil
e, tc.
With
wyoung ick
heliograph
until
the
station
making
demand signal
there
tis atoendenlers
obscure
their
light
intimating
that
they
are
satisfied
; he cy
tdirection
lamp
position
or
of
shadow
the respo
to
,acall
light
for
b y nd
will
spot
at makin
deman
upon
saimilargd
once
noted
care
a,bend
taken
these
that
are
CHAP. III.-SIGNAL STATIONS .
altered
.not call
the
If
maintained
is the
distan
;statio
his nt
thabit
alignment
the
of
heliograph should
be
check
a, nd ed
they
the state
or
of
wpencil
,selime
looked
.be
to ick
tc.
hould willinstru
be
The
sender
should
give
all
attention
his
to
lamp
or rectif
to ycted
heliograph
,whilst
the
answer
reader
must their
light
own
first
, nd
then
aif
keep
eye
his
on maythey
ademan
necessary d
distant
the
station
that
so
directly
light
obscured
is
he light
from
distan
the
bettert
intimate
can
same
the
to
sender
by
once
at
saying
.Down
" statio
. n
M.d
)(iscellaneous
Who
10.
?are
you RU hen
answer
general
,tthe
By doubt
any
be
If
to
likely
is
there
call
their
and
sending of
sig-
as
aparty
whether
to
.
name hostile
or
friendly
aare
nallers
be
should
signal
prearranged
call
addition
.to
the
used
in
11. MQ answer
general
the
By
... atemporary
for
.Used
delay
Wait..
?
ready
you
Are
12. KQ answer
general
the
By
... when
used
be
to
only
This
is
the
suppose
to
reason
is
there
distant
.
ready
not
is
station
Go
13.
on G tBy
, hen
answer
general
the been
has
which
by
astation
Sent
complying
. to
com-
and
ready
is
called
up
sent
has
which
or
work
mence
MQKQ
dreceived
,has
oirect- r
resume
ready
to
are
ly
they
page
(vide
).work
123
will
station
receiving
The
D
,*expected
answer
NoD
14. station
the
receiving
when
Used
receipt
the
acknowledge owing
answer
(a)unable
is to
resume
or
message
the
of the
in
being
enemy
the
to
is
it
as
soon
answering being
position
the
and
vicinity
to
possible
or
convenient signals
or
disclosed
thereby
itself
signal
The the
of
a(b)t; ikelihood
lread o
s. 109.
.
so
do
.
answered
be
not
will gas
or
clouded
,being
sun
short
;(c)t,etc.
roil o
unning
,short
hbeing
-station
the anded
is
it
reason
other
any
for
if
or
send
to
not
advantageous
found
station
sending
. he
Tanswers
group
word
each
send
,will
increase
to
as
s, wice
tetc. o
read
.of
being
its
chance
the
Send
15.
,D
DD
mes-D ΝΑ and
By
answer
general
the .
14
on
See
remarks
sages
. then
.comp
ying
16.
No
more NN
messages answer
By
.the
general
comin
presen
at gt for
only
used
Come
17.
in CI complying
By
.RD
and is
signal
This
,it
sig-
purposes
instructional
check
".in
and
"ome
cnifies
3rd
and
2nd
the
between
pause
awith
sone
group
in
SD.ent
*light
127
128 CHAP. IV THE MESSAGE FORM .
CHAPTER IV.
THE MESSAGE FORM.
110. DESCRIPTION.
1. The printed forms on which messages are written, namely,

the " A Form " (A.F. C 2121) and the " C Form ""
(A.F. C 2123 ) are the same as those used in telegraphy. The
" B Form " (A.F. C 2122) used in telegraphy for writing
messages transmitted through the station, is not used in
signalling, the " A Form " being used instead.
2. The "A Form" is used for all messages to be despatched .
In a transmitting station this includes messages received for
transmission (viz. those whose prefix contains the letter
" X ") . This is the usual form issued to staffs and units .
Instructions for those writing messages will be issued with
the " A " Form .
3. The " C Form " is used for messages to be delivered at a
station (viz . : those whose prefix contains the letter " S ") .
111. DIVISIONS OF FORM.

1. The A Form is divided into the following parts : -
Preamble . Address from.
Address to . See pages 130 and 131 .
Text of the message.
2. The "C Form " is divided in the same general way as the
" A Form, " but is adapted to messages received for delivery
at a station , each form is therefore printed in duplicate, one
copy having spaces for the whole preamble for retention in
the signal station , the other having spaces only for instruc-
s. 112. 129
tions, office of origin and time of despatch and receipt, for

delivery to the addressee. The space Z, not being required,
is omitted. For examples of these Forms, see pages 130-3,
and for instructions for using them see Sections 152 and 154 .
112. PREAMBLE.
This consists of prefix, code, office of origin and service
instructions, and number of words, it is reserved solely for
the use of the signaller dealing with the message ; nothing
is to be written by the addressor on that portion of the form
above the Address TO. (When a message is to be signalled
no signature of Franking Officer is required unless special
instructions relating to charges for private and press messages
are issued . )
113. PREFIXES .
These are signalled at the commencement of a message,
and serve the double purpose of giving precedence of
despatch to the more important messages ; and, secondly,
indicating to the signallers receiving a message whether it is
to be transmitted by them or delivered to the addressee from
their own station . When the prefix contains the letter X the
former will be indicated , if S the latter.
A prefix, which contains the letter " X," will always (unless
the message is for " All stations " ) be followed , in the same
group, by the " call " of the station , for which the message
is intended, but only the prefix will be written down , not the
" call ."
All prefixes will always be acknowledged by repeating the
letters sent (including the " call , " when one has been sent).
F
A
. orm 2121
.C.
Form
Army
MESS
AND
SIGNA
. AGES
LS No.
of
Message
Prefix- Code Words
. Cha
. rge
..m
130
and
Origin
of
Office
Service This
messag
on
is
:oa/cf e Rec
at
. d
Instructions
. .
.m
Sent
. Servic
D. ate e
At .
.m
To- From
of
SF"( ignature
ranking
By
. Office
)." r B
.y
ΤΟ
Number
S*ender's Month
of
Day Number
reply
In
to
AAA
From
CHAP. IV. THE MESSAGE FORM.
Place
Time
The
above
may
be
forwarde
now
corrected
.as ) d
(Z
Cens
. or Signatur
Addresso
of
person
or
authoris
to r
eed
telegrap
his
in
name
. h
line
*This
should
erased
be
not
if
.required
Form
.C S
TELEGRAP
ARMY No.
of
.&IGNALS HS Message
out Office
Stamp
.
Recd Prefix Code Words Sent
,or
Sent
from At- .M
.
Means Collected
...
Paid
out By-
.
By Distance
Returned-
Delivery.
Delivery.
Charges for
.
Instructi
Service ons at .
.M
the at e
Offic .M
. at
here
Received .
.M
at
in
Handed
TO
Month
the
of
Day Numb
to
reply
In er AAA
s. 113.
SNumber
*ender's
From
Place
Time
by
account
to
brought
be
are
delivery
on
collected
charges
other
All r
edirection
oRPorterage
,,paid
amounts
and
charges
such
of
particulars
,aform
the
face
to
affixed
Stamps
ofnd
means
Delivery
for
harges
nd
elivery
CaDheaded
space
n
the
iabove
writing
in
.forth
set
"be
to
,are
out
required
.if
not
erased
be
should
line
This
.Station
Signal
the
in
filed
be
Fto
Corm
.-
NOTE
131
Form
.C S
.&IGNALS HS
TELEGRAP
ARMY No.
of
Message_
132
Office
Stamp
.
m
same
the
,of
repetition
for
application
Telegram
othis
respecting
Inquiries ray
its
bebe &
to
as
complaint
any
;athould
c.,sdelay
ut
Office
bDelivering
the
made
must
form
this
case
either
charge
in
officer
the
.Iton
addressed
and
writing
made
complaint
.or
inquiries
such
accompany
£
d.S.
.
Instructions
Service Cha rges
} Charges
the
at
in
Handed at
Office .
.M Received
at
here .
.M
CHAP. IV.
ΤΟ
Number
Sender's Number
to
reply
In
Month
the
of
Day A
THE MESSAGE FORM .
From
Place
Time
Addressee
.to
delivered
Fbe
Corm
-
NOTE
on
131
page
the
.form
shown
message
written
the
of
copy
This
acarbon
is
s. 113. 133
2. Officers in charge of the signal arrangements are alone

empowered to send " signal service messages requiring
immediate attention . ""
' They should never do so unless such
a course is absolutely necessary.
Authority also will be deputed to certain officers to send
" military"" railway service messages, requiring immediate
attention .'
No one but the commander on the spot, or an officer
expressly authorized by him, is to frank a message "Priority."
Authority to frank a message thus will be sparingly delegated ,
and the number of "" Priority 99 messages must be kept at a
minimum . The names of officers having this authority will
be supplied to the local signal stations and published in local
orders.
In all these three cases, the officer who authorizes
the message, will write the words "Urgent Signal, " "Urgent
Railway" or "Priority" as the case may be , in space Z,
which must be signed .
""
Any officer who has not authority to send " Priority
messages may, under urgent circumstances, order a message
to be sent thus , but the order must in such cases be supported
by his own signature, and he will be held responsible that the
urgency is sufficient to warrant such action .
3. Messages, other than those already referred to in this
section, must be signed by one of the following officers : -
i. A commander.
ii. An officer of the staff.
iii. The head or representative of an administrative
service or department .
iv . An officer holding a special appointment.
v. The signaller in charge of a station. (" S.G." or
" X.G." messages only.)
vi . In the case of " Press Messages " special instructions
will be issued .
4. All messages will be classed and prefixed under one of the
following headings which are arranged in order of precedence .
134 CHAP . IV. THE MESSAGE FORM.
If a station has two messages to send away with different

prefixes, it will signal that with the higher one first, although
it may have been handed in after the other.
Messages to be Messages to be
Delivered at Transmitted at Class.
Receiving Stn. Receiving Stn.
DS DX Signal service messages requiring

immediate attention (to be marked
" Urgent Signal ").
SA ΧΑ Military railway service messages
requiring immediate attention (to
be marked " Urgent Railway ").
SB XB Messages " O.H.M.S." marked
Priority.
SG XG Signal Service Messages.
SM ΧΜ Messages "O.H.M.S." not marked
Priority.
S X Private Messages Equal as
SRP XRP Reply paid Messages regards
SP XP Press Messages Precedence.
5. A message in course of transmission will never be inter-

rupted, if this can possibly be avoided . Signallers will use
their discretion in stopping work on a message in order to
deal with one of a higher prefix, taking the following points
into consideration, viz . : -the length of the messages, their
importance, and how near they are to the end of the message ;
press and private messages must never be allowed to delay
messages 0.H.M.S. This applies to a message that is being
received as well as to one being sent.
6. If it is necessary to interrupt a message , it will be done
by using the Stop Signal (PP) (see Sections 159 and 178) as
follows : -The station which has the important message will
send " PP " and on receiving the answer " PP " will send
the prefix of the fresh message and the " Call " of the station
s. 113. 135
to which the fresh message is addressed (if an " X " message) ,

both sent in one group, which will be answered by itself.
e.g. In a line of stations whose calls are PA to PF.
In the middle of a message-either sending or receiving-
a fresh message for PD, marked " Priority " and duly signed,
is handed in at PA.
In view of the existing circumstances, the N.C.O. in charge
of the station considers the interruption of the message they
are engaged on, unavoidable.
Therefore : -
PA sends to PB PP
PB answers PP Note. The prefix only, not
PA sends ... XBPD the station call will be
PB answers XBPD entered on the form.
PAthen proceeds with the message (See page 129).
As soon as the signal " XBPD " is received at PB, the

" Stop Signal " followed by " XBPD " will be sent to PC,
who will send the " Stop Signal " followed by " SB " to
PD, as described in the case of PA.
The procedure with a message, whose prefix is DX , DS ,
XA, or SA, will be exactly similar.
7. It is evident that such interruptions cause serious waste
of time in the transmission of messages.
Officers, who order messages to be "" sent as " Urgent Signal , "
" Urgent Railway, " or " Priority assume a grave responsi-
bility and should be quite certain , before doing so , that the
importance of the message justifies their action.
8. Should it be necessary to interrupt a message when using
the " Moving Station Method " (see Section 129) the same
procedure will be adopted .
NOTES . (i . ) Officers only will be permitted to send messages
in code or cipher, which must always bear their signature ,
rank and appointment.
136 CHAP . IV . THE MESSAGE FORM .
(ii.) Special arrangements will be made by the General Staff

regulating the censorship and despatch of private or press
messages. They will not be accepted unless the opening of
the station for that purpose has been duly authorised and
notified.
See also Field Service Regulations. Part I, Chapter II ,
Section 18.
114. CODE TIME.

1. The time at which a message is finally accepted for trans-
mission by the Office of Origin, irrespective of the time of
writing or time taken in delivering it at the station, is called
the code time and is shown on the form in the space marked
" Code. " The following system is adopted being a more
expeditious way of signalling it, than spelling it out or send-
ing it in figures.
2. The twelve hours from one in the afternoon to midnight
and from one in the morning to midday, are denoted by the
first twelve letters of the alphabet omitting J, thus : —
AB0A
A denotes 1. E denotes 5. I denotes 9.

В 99 2. F 99 6. K 99 10.
C 22 3. G 99 7. L 99 11.
D 29 4. H 99 8. M 99 12.
These letters , moreover, stand not only for the hours, but for
the twelve periods of five minutes. Thus A stands for one
o'clock and for five minutes past any hour ; B stands for two
o'clock and for ten minutes past any hour ; F stands for six
o'clock and for thirty minutes past any hour . So that AA
means 1.5 ; AB means 1.10 ; BF means 2.30 and so on. To
denote the intermediate minutes in every period of five
minutes, the letters R. S. W, X are employed , R denoting the
first, S the second , W the third, and X the fourth minute
after any of the periods of five minutes. Thus MR means one
minute past twelve ; MS means 12.2 ; MW means 12.3 ; and
s. 114. 137
MX means 12.4. So
S X RI again MAR means
XL R W M S W X 12.6 ; FFS means
xL A RS 6.32 ; KLX means
RS
W
10.59 and so on.

The following is a
斤 sketch of an ordinary
clock face with the
letters placed against
C the hours, periods of
Þ five minutes, and in-
termediate minutes
which they denote.
O The hands of the
clock show that the
G. time is 5.52 , and the
F MS letters which denote
that time are EKS.
3. The letters " a.m,"99 66 p.m 99 are always entered and sent
in conjunction with the above . If messages are handed in
exactly at noon or midnight they will be coded one minute
later so as to avoid confusion . Thus a message handed in at
midnight would be coded " MRam ," and one at midday
" MRpm. "
4. The code time will be entered immediately the signalling
station finally takes over the message ; it will be entered and
signalled as above, but at the receiving terminal station will
be shown in figures.
5. It will be acknowledged by repeating the letters sent .
6. When a station has two or more messages with the same
prefixes waiting to be sent, it will send them in their proper
turn according to the code time.
138 CHAP. IV. THE MESSAGE FORM .
115 . OFFICE OF ORIGIN AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS .
1. The office of origin is the name of the station at which the
message is handed in by the addressor ; the " call " repre-
senting it is entered on the form and signalled , but at the
receiving terminal the name is written in full.
2. Service instructions are used under the following circum-
stances, they are entered and signalled in full, each word
being answered .
i. When a message has been unduly delayed the cause
will
66 be entered, thus " Delayed by fog last night."
' Hazy till ten ."
ii. When a message is redirected (see Section 170) the ""
words " Redirected from..... at (time)
(and " date," if necessary) will be entered.
iii. When a similarly worded message is to be delivered to
more than one addressee , the number will be
entered thus " Four Addresses ."
iv. When a message is not completed on the day of the
month to which the code time refers , the original
date will be entered by the station first acknow-
ledging receipt of the message on the following
day ; thus if a message handed in and finally
accepted at 11.55 p.m. on the 15th, is delayed in
starting for six or more minutes, the sending
terminal would enter " Code fifteenth " ; or again ,
if the same message although completed , or
partially completed by the sending terminal before
midnight had to pass through several transmitting
stations and consequently arrived at the receiving
terminal on the 16th, then the station who first
acknowledged the correct receipt of the message
on the 16th, would enter " Code fifteenth. "
v. Occasions may arise when it is convenient or desirable
to send a message by different methods through
different parts of its journey. Thus a message
might be signalled into a town for further trans-
mission by post, or it might be telegraphed as far
s. 116. 139
as possible and sent on by signal . In the latter

and similar cases an explanation should be entered ,
on receipt at the signalling""station thus. ""
" From telegraph at... followed by " time '
and if necessary " date." (See Section 173. )
116. WORDS AND CHARGE .

1. The number of words contained in the message (counted
in accordance with the rules given in Chap . V) will be
entered in figures thus , "" 28," but will be signalled as
twenty eight in one group, and acknowledged by the
general answer.
2. No charges will be collected by signallers unless special
instructions are issued to that effect.
117. SENT AND RECEIVED COLUMNS .

1. The information entered in these spaces is not to be sig-
nalled ; it affords , together with that in the foregoing
portions of the preamble, a complete history of the message
during transmission .
2. A message is said to be " sent " at the time when the
sending station reads the distant station's acknowledgment
that the message has been correctly received . Similarly a
message is said to be " received " at the time a receiving
station sends this same acknowledgment .
3. In the spaces To "" and From.... on
the " A Form " and in the space 66 Received from " on the
" C Form " will be entered the " call " of the stations to
whom the message is66 sent or from whom it has been received .
4. In the spaces By... " will be entered the rank ,
name and initial of the " sender " and " reader " of the
message.
5. Any of the above spaces which do not apply to a particu-
lar station will be left blank, but all stations must enter
their own call and the date on the line " Date ...... " in
140 CHAP. IV. THE MESSAGE FORM .
the Received Column on the " A Form " and under " Office
Stamp on the " C Form " ; this is necessary to identify a
form with the station dealing with it.
6. The following example shows these spaces as completed
by a sending terminal, a transmitting, and a receiving
terminal station respectively.
Sending terminal : —Glasgow, call GW, sender Cpl. W.
White.
Transmitting station : -Stirling , call ST, reader Pte . J.
McNeil, sender Pte. R. Green .
Receiving terminal : -Perth , call PR, reader Pte. T. King .
The message has been sent from Glasgow to Perth via
Stirling. It was handed in at 10.40 a.m.
The acknowledgment that the message has been correctly
received was sent from Stirling to Glasgow at 10.58 a.m.;
that from Perth to Stirling at 11.7 a.m. Date : -2nd May,
1898 .
The message was delivered to the addressee in Perth by an
orderly (Pte . Smith, J.) .
GLASGOW.
Sent Recd. at
GW
At 10.58 a.m. Date...
2/5/98.
To ST. From
By Cpl. White, W. By......
STIRLING .
Sent. Recd. at 10.58 a.m.
ST.
At 11.7 a.m. Date...
2/5/98.
To PR. From GW.
By Pte. Green, R. By Pte. McNeil , J.
s. 118 141
PERTH .
Sent, or Sent out Office Stamp
Recd At 11.10 a.m.
from ST. PR.
By Pte. Smith, J.
By Pte. King, T. Returned..... 2/5/98.
at 11.40 a.m.
Handed in at the Glasgow Office at 10.40 a.m.
Received here at 11.7 a.m.
118. NUMBER OF MESSAGE.
At each station all messages , whether sent, transmitted
or received , will be numbered in the space provided in the
upper-right hand corner of the form as laid down in Section
126 ; this number will not be signalled . Certain particulars
regarding""each message will be entered in the " abstract of
messages (vide p. 146) ; the above number serves the pur-
pose of connecting these entries in the " abstract " with the
form on which the message in question will be found.
119. ADDRESS TO AND ADDRESS FROM .
1. The addresses " To " and " From " will be signalled
without abbreviation exactly as they are written by the
addressor ; they will always be entered , by signallers , in
BLOCK LETTERS. Station calls must never be written
or signalled as part of the addresses, the names of places
always being signalled exactly as written by the addressor
himself.
2. Should the addressor wish any instructions regarding the
delivery of, or replies to, a message to be signalled , he will
enter the same after the " address to," but in the same
portion of the form , thus :
O. C. West Yorks.
To await arrival.
or 1st Division .
ALTON (or forward).
3. After sending the number of " words " each word of the
address " To," will be signalled ; this will be followed by any
instructions there may be.
1842 K
142 CHAP . IV.-THE MESSAGE FORM .
120. BREAK SIGNAL .

The Break Signal , " by morse and ii by
semaphore, will then be signalled to separate the " address
To," from the " Text " ; it will not be entered on the form ;
it will be acknowledged by the general answer.
The break signal will likewise be used after the last word
of the " Text, " to separate that portion of the message from
the " address From ."
121. TEXT.
1. Each word, &c . , will be signalled so that it may appear
on the addressee's copy of the message, as nearly as possible
the same as the original, written and handed in by the
addressor ; except in the case of cipher. See Section 134 .
2. Any word which has been written in an abbreviated form
by the addressor , will be signalled as written and will be left
on the addressee's copy as read at the receiving terminal. For
example lbs . for pounds, no . for number, ult. for ultimo ,
Nov. for November, &c .
3. The first line of the text is divided into four spaces
marked respectively, " Senders Number," " Day of Month, ”
" In reply to Number," and "AAA."
4. All officers should number their messages (no matter by
what means they are conveyed) consecutively. This number
should be entered by the addressor in figures in the space
marked " Sender's Number ."
5. When replying to a message, its number should always
be entered in the space 64 In reply to Number. " These numbers
and the date will always be signalled and entered in their
proper position, as written by the addressor.
6. The letters " AAA," as printed on the form, are sig-
nalled as a group of three letters to prevent any possibility of
these preceding reference numbers being confused with num-
bers occurring at the commencement of the message itself.
7. Should these spaces not be required the whole line will
be erased and the "AAA " will not be sent.
8. Instructions for the guidance of the addressor will be
found in " Field Service Regulations, " Part I, Chapter II.
122. SPACE Z ON THE A FORM.
1. Special instructions will generally be issued with regard
to messages being signed by the 66 Censor "" and 66 Franking
s. 123. 143
Officer " ; usually this would only be necessary in the case of

Press and Private messages .
2. Space Z must always bear the signature of the addressor
or that of the officer sending the message on his behalf (sub-
ject to the conditions mentioned in Section 113). The sig-
natures are not signalled , but are required so that the
responsibility for the matter, etc., of a message can, if
necessary, be traced to an individual.
123. MESSAGES ON PLAIN PAPER, ETO.
If a message is handed in to a signal station written on
paper other than on the form above described, the details of
the preamble will be entered above the address " To. " Should
space not permit of this, the message will be attached to a
blank form and these details entered thereon ; the Addresses
" To " and " From," and the " Text " will not be copied on
to the form. The original message must bear the signature
of the addressor or person sending the message in his name
and will always be retained .
124. DUPLICATE COPY AT TERMINAL RECEIVING STATION .
Directly the writer at a station hears a prefix containing
the letter S he knows that the message about to be received
will have to be delivered from his station, and, therefore
uses a " C Form " and takes a duplicate copy of it by insert-
ing a piece of carbon paper between two forms. The dupli-
cate or carbon copy is delivered to the addressee and the
original retained .
125. DELIVERY OF MESSAGES.
When practicable the duplicate copy of the message will be
enclosed in an envelope , A.F. C 398 (vide page 145) , which will
be directed by copying the address “ To . " and inserting the
necessary particulars. The message will then be delivered
by an orderly to the addressee or his representative, who will
fill up and sign the receipt for the same in the space provided
on the envelope. The envelope must be brought back by the
144 CHAP. IV . THE MESSAGE FORM .
orderly to the signal station and will be carefully preserved .

If envelopes are not available, a receipt should be obtained
either by means of a despatch book (embodying the same
particulars as entered on the envelope) , or by having the
original copy signed .
126. STATION ABSTRACT AND FILE.
1. When the receiving or sending has been completed and
the message form filled in, the following information will be
entered on A.F. B 118 Abstract of Messages dealt with (vide
example on page 146). Abstracts will be kept in every
station, two in every terminal and three in every trans-
mitting station for each class of messages dealt with. A
separate form will be used for messages " Forwarded , ”
" Transmitted " and " Received, " and the messages will be
numbered consecutively on each abstract form.
2. The message form will then be placed on a file and
retained.
127. DISPOSAL OF MESSAGES .
The Director of Signals will issue instructions to Signal
Officers as regards the ultimate disposal of the forms. In
accordance with these instructions a signal officer will direct
all stations under his charge to periodically forward their
files of messages together with the abstracts of the same to
him .
123. MESSAGES ENTAILING THE USE OF MORE THAN
ONE FORM .
When a message is so long that it cannot be entirely
written on one form it will be continued on the text portion
of a second and if necessary subsequent forms , the address
" From " always being entered in its proper place on the last
form used . The number of the message in the upper right-
hand corner, and the call and date in the received column
will be entered on all the forms , which will, in addition , be
numbered consecutively in some conspicuous place on the
upper part of each . The particulars as to " sent " and
" received "' will be entered only on the first form.
FORM
.ARMY
398
C.
:-
TO
DESPATCH
. RECEIP
. T
...
No
Sender's Date
.. .
hour .
m
s 128.
Date
. ..
hour .
m Signature
:--
.
ORDINARY
or
URGENT
T
be he
envelope
.(i) his
"NOTES
words
to
returned
bearer are
printed
on
.
back
at
flap
the
145
ARMY
.
SIGNALS 118
.B.
Form
Army
Forwarded Office
date
stamp
.
*
Transmitted
of
ABSTRACT witht es
dealsag
mes
...
146
Received
at
. .
..on .19
words
Two
(*
these
.)of
erased
be
to
Office
No. To No. Army
Date
.ooff Signals
. P.O. Total
. REMARKS
of
Origin
M.
.
NAME Place
. words
£
d.8. S. d. £ S. d.
CH
cs.
cas
which they apply.
Signal," "Urgent Railway"
rPriority" will be written
opposite those messages to
NOTE. The words "Urgent
CHAP. IV. THE MESSAGE FORM .
forward
Carried
66 "" NOTESwords
the
with
in
filled
be
will
"ospace
ilitary
his
M.(i)TPrivate
ror
as
ordered
be
.may
station
these
of
tforms
,two
kept
be
in
awill erminal
)I(iiransmitting
nnd
station
.,ftor
with
dealt
messages
of
class
each
hree
§(icash
)T
often
may
notes
and
Signallers
by
required
be
seldom
will
columns
iihe
refer
with
,ithe
be to .g.
n
they
which
message
ewritten
line
in
them
across
bearer
the
name
of
Orderly
,tby
received
or
sent
messages
case
ofhe
the
.
here
written
be
should
s. 129. 147
129. METHOD OF SENDING A MESSAGE FROM A MOVING

STATION (WITH ANY APPARATUS).
1. In the majority of messages sent by signallers the
" Moving Station " method will be adopted, that is to say,
the whole of the preamble will be omitted except the number
of words and any service instructions which it may be
impossible to omit.
2. The cases in which the full preamble is to be used are :
i. Always when a message reaches a station from
another signal station or from a telegraph
station, with the preamble already completed.
ii. As a general rule , in a line of permanent signal
stations .
CHAPTER V.
THE COUNTING, SIGNALLING, AND ENTERING OF

WORDS, CERTAIN SIGNS , AND FIGURES .
130.
In this chapter and elsewhere, when letters , signs, figures,
etc. , are enclosed in square brackets , " thus [ ]" it is
intended to indicate that they are signalled in a group by
themselves.
131 .
All words , figures , etc. , in the address " To," the " Text, "
and the address " From " of a message will be counted in
148 CHAP. V. THE COUNTING , SIGNALLING , &o.
accordance with the following rules . The number of
" Words so counted will be entered and signalled as part of
the preamble. Each word will be entered as far as possible
in a separate space on the form, but the numbers of messages
such as " A 23 " or " B 109 " should each be entered in one
space, though counting as two words.
132. COUNTING WORDS.

1. Messages in Latin, in any modern European language,
or in the vernacular when working with native troops, and
written in English characters , are to be counted in the same
way as messages in the English language, but words not
forming part of such languages are to be counted at the rate
of five letters to one word.
2. The system of counting is that followed by the Post
Office.
3. Except in case of figures, ordinal numbers , cipher (when
working with the Navy), or when sending such signs as
brackets , underline, &c. , every expression , which is counted
as one word , will be signalled as one group.
(A) Compound words : -
i. Combinations of two or more words are to be sent in
separate groups and counted as separate words, but,
combined words, which the usage of the language
allows to be written together, or, coupled by
hyphens, and which are so written by the originator
of the message, must be sent in one group and
counted as single words ; e.g. , fifty-five, lieutenant-
general , father - in-law, linen-draper,__ frostbitten ,
ironworks, table-cloth, Weston-Super-Mare , Aix-la-
Chapelle . An exception to this rule occurs in the
case of certain names of places, mentioned below in
sub-paragraph B.
ii . The intention is that all expressions , which, by the
usage of the English language are written as single
words (with or without hyphens) shall be accepted as
single words. Whether they appear in a dictionary
s. 132. 149
or not, if these expressions are usually written as

single words, that is to be taken as the guide , and
they are to be counted accordingly.
It may be difficult sometimes to determine what the
usage is, in these cases the benefit of any reasonable
doubt is to be given to the originator and if he
writes the expression as a single word , it is to be
accepted as such.
iii. In any case, in which the expression of the nature of a
compound word, is accepted as a single word, it must
be so written by the originator. For example , if the
originator wishes 66 twenty-five " to pass as a single
word he must write it not as "" twenty five, " but as
46 twenty-five." On no account are words written
separately by the originator to be joined together by
the signaller, except as shown in sub-paras . B (i) (ii)
and (iii) . Otherwise the sense of the message
might be destroyed .
66 twenty five quire packetsIf ""the originator writes
on no account is this
66 twenty-five quire packets . "
to be altered to
iv. It must be clearly understood that the authority to
decide in favour of the originator in doubtful cases ,
is not to be regarded as authorizing the acceptance
of every combination which the sender may write
as a single word . For example, such 66manifestly
improper combinations as " verywell ," alright,"
goodbusiness," must be signalled in two groups
and counted as two words each .
(B) Names : -
1. In telegraphy the names of all towns and villages and
of all telegraph offices in the United Kingdom (except
town sub-offices) , and of foreign telegraph offices
published in the international list of telegraph offices,
count as single words, irrespective of the number of
words of which they are composed. As signallers
cannot refer to books on the subject, the rule to be
followed is, that all names of towns and villages will
be counted as one word each. The various parts of
150 CHAP. V. — THE COUNTING, SIGNALLING , &c.
such names will be joined by hyphens by the signaller

and each name thus joined will be sent in one group ,
eg , Newcastle-on-Tyne, Melton-Mowbray, New-
Orleans, are each sent as one group and count as one
werd each. 66 Hyde Park Road " (a town sub-office)
and Great George Street " (a street in a town)
each count as three words, and are sent in three
groups .
ii. St. or S always counts as part of a word, it is sent in
the same group with it, and a hyphen should be sig-
nalled between the prefix and the rest of the name
in all cases . If the originator insists on writing the
prefix in full , thus " Saint, " it must be sent in a
separate group and counted as a separate word.
iii. The above two cases are the only ones in which marks
of punctuation may be added by signallers.
iv. Names like Mac Donald , Mc Donald , Fitz Gerald ,
O'Neil , De Morgan , De la Rue, St. -John, should be
sent in one group and counted as one word each ;
but double names of persons , such as " Bouverie-
Tracey," are sent in two (or more) groups and
counted as two (or more) words whether written with
a hyphen or without.
(C) Abbreviations : -
i . Such
66 abbreviations as "can't, " "couldn't, " "won't, "
don't," etc., will be counted as single words .
ii. All initial letters, no matter how written, will be counted
as one word each, whether followed by a stop or not.
Thus A.A.G. , A.A-G. , aag, are each sent as three
groups and count as three words. The exceptions to
this rule are, that the letters am and pm referring to
time , the initials of London Postal Districts , such
as S.W. or E.C. , the signs c/o, a/c, and b/l (see Sec-
tion 133), and the initials " H.M.S. " meaning His
Majesty's Ship (if they occur in the " Address To " ),
will be sent as one group, and counted as one word
for each group, no matter how written .
s. 133. 151
(D) Miscellaneous Signals ·:--

When prefixes , code time, station calls , and miscel-
laneous signals [e.g. , XM, LEPM, GD (meaning
Guildford) or IMI] , occur in the text of a message,
they will always be signalled as one group and
counted as one word each .
133. PUNCTUATIONS AND VARIOUS SIGNS .

1. The following signs (except the full-stop, oblique stroke
and horizontal bar, when used with figures (for which see
Section 138) will count as one word each .
Morse. Semaphore.
Full stop AAA
Underline ... UK
Parentheses or brackets KK
Inverted Commas ᎡᎡ
Oblique stroke ….. ... LT
Horizontal bar ... NR
e.g. Your message do not advance to " place (therein
mentioned)-counts as 12 words, and the three signs
used will be signalled both before and after the
word, or words, which they affect.
When the full stop , oblique stroke, and horizontal
bar count as a word, each will be sent as a group
as [B] [ - ] [Modified] .
2. As an exception to the above, the following symbols will
be counted as one word and signalled in one group each ,
viz. : 66 c/o " meaning 66 care of," a/c meaning 66 account ,'""
and "" b/l " meaning bill of lading ."
The hyphen (signalled by morse and NV
by semaphore) is treated as follows :
i. When it connects compound words, which together
count as one word, it is signalled in its place in the
group and does not count at all, e.g. [ father-in-law]
or [St-John ] each one group and one word.
152 CHAP . V. THE COUNTING , SIGNALLING . &o.
ii. When it connects two or more words, which are counted
as separate words (as in the case of double names)
and are consequently sent as separate groups ; it is
signalled in the same group as the word preceding it
and does not count at all, e.g. [Bouverie-] [Tracey]
sent as two groups and counted as 2 words.
iii. When it connects words which are quite distinct from
one another, as when describing a road, position , etc. ,
it is sent in 66a group by itself and is then counted as
a word, e.g. [The] [ FARNHAM] [ -] [ ALDERSHOT [—
[ BAGSHOT] [Road] " is sent in 7 groups and counted
as 7 words.
iv. With figures, it is signalled and counted as a figure
(see Section 138) .
134. CIPHER, &C.

1. Cipher whether composed of figures or letters will usually
be written in groups of five. Should a message in cipher
be handed in, written otherwise, the signaller will divide
up the cipher into groups of five figures or letters , by
drawing short vertical lines ; any odd letters over
being left by themselves . Each group whether complete or
otherwise will be counted as a word and signalled separately.
It must, however , be borne in mind , that, when working with
the Royal Navy, groups of letters or figures must always be
signalled exactly as written .
2. Cipher will be preceded and followed by the cipher sign
CC. This will be acknowledged by the general answer, but
it will not be counted nor entered on the form. In the case
of figure cipher the double sign CC FI (sent in one group)
will precede the cipher , but the sign CC by itself will be sent
on conclusion of the same.
3. Each group of letter cipher will be acknowledged by
repeating it back exactly as received. Each group of figure
cipher will be acknowledged by the " check."
4. All cipher groups must be entered particularly clearly
and letter cipher will always be written in block letters .
s. 135. 153
135. IMPORTANT WORDS.

Should there be any important word in the message, which
it is desirable should be repeated back by the receiving station
as a check that they have read it correctly, it will be pre-
ceded and followed by the cipher sign and the word will be
written in block capitals . For example suppose the message
to contain the words " move to Shannon " and the caller
considers there is a possibility of " Shandon " being read for
" Shannon " ; the sending station would send (CC) , which
would be answered with the general answer, the sending
station then send (SHANNON) , and the receiving station
instead of acknowledging this with the general answer, repeat
back (SHANNON), the sending station now send (CC) which
is again acknowledged with the general answer and the
message is continued in the ordinary way. A word or words
thus signalled will not be treated as cipher for purposes of
counting.
136. BLOCK LETTERS .
Any word or part of a message written for clearness in block
letters will be preceded and followed by the " Block " sign ,
i.e. the letter (Z) ; this will not be entered on the form, nor
will it be counted , but indicates to the writer that that
portion of the message must be written in block letters . As
the addresses and letter cipher or important words preceded
and followed by the cipher sign are always to be entered in
block letters , the block sign is not required in these cases.
137. FIGURES .
1. Numbers expressed in figures , whether in the addresses or
text, will be counted at the rate of five figures to one word ;
thus : 7, 12, 38563 each count as one word and 396711 ,
3974256893, each count as two words. Each group of figures
as written by the addressor will be counted and signalled
separately and entered in separate spaces on the form, no
matter how many or how few figures there may be in the
group ; thus 754, 42, must be signalled in two groups , and
counted as two words.
154 CHAP . V. THE COUNTING , SIGNALLING, &o.
2. Figures as explained in Chapter I , will be preceded by FI

and followed by FF, but these signs will never be counted or
entered on the form. Each group of figures will be checked
by the " Check " ; when two or more groups of figures follow
one another, a group will always be checked before sending
the one following it.
138. FULL STOP, OBLIQUE STROKE, HORIZONTAL BAR AND

HYPHEN, USED WITH FIGURES.
1. This may be done to separate figures as in the case of time
or date, or to denote a decimal point. The signs will be
signalled as shown in Section 133, but they will each count
as a figure and will be sent back with the letters when check-
ing. Thus : 3141 counts as five figures hence as one word.
It is signalled [3 . 141 ] and checked by
[c . ada ] , 5-6-09 counts as six figures,
hence as two words. It is signalled [5 6
09] and checked by [e
f ki] .
2. When used between letters and figures, the full stop ,
oblique stroke , horizontal bar and hyphen, will be signalled
in the same group as the figures and will each count as a
figure, e.g. A- 76931 counts as one letter and six figures ,
hence as three words . The symbol % meaning "per cent ."
counts as three figures, and is signalled " [nought oblique
stroke nought ] ," it will be preceded by FI, or numerical sign ,
followed by FF, or alphabetical sign , and checked in the usual
way. If used with other figures it will be treated as a
fraction (see Section 140).
139. LETTERS OR WORDS AND FIGURES COMBINED.

1. The letters a.m. and p.m. referring to time and
following figures will be signalled in a group by themselves ,
separated from the figures by FF, and entered in a separate
space on the form .
&o.
preceded byFI
be counted or
ill be checked
figures follow
before sending
TAL BAR AND
he case oftime
signs will be
will each count
rs when check-
as one word.
d checked by THE
as six figures.
JOHN CRERAR
LIBRARY
the full stop ,
Ell be signalled
ch count as a
nd six figures.
g "per cent. "
ought aolblique
numeric sign.l
ed in the usua
treated as a
D
OMBINE .
to time ansd
lve
by themse ,e
t
in a se ra
p a
THE
JOHN CRERAR
LIBRARY
s. 140. 155
• 2. Letters and words combined with figures otherwise than
as above, will be counted , signalled and entered separately to
the figures, except that letters following figures to denote
ordinal numbers or fractions , e.g. , 1st , ths, will be entered
in the same space as the figures they follow, and count as
figures. The numbers of messages will also be entered in one
space , see Section 131 .
140. WHOLE NUMBERS AND FRACTIONS .

Whole numbers followed by fractions will be signalled in
one group, but will be separated from one another by MM ,
which sign will be sent back with the check letters . The
whole number and the fraction will be entered in the same
space on the message form.
141. ROMAN NUMERALS .

Signallers should not accept messages containing Roman
numerals such as 66'IX," but the addressor should be asked
to substitute the corresponding figure or to spell it out. In
the event of this being impossible, figures should be signalled
in the ordinary way wherever Roman numerals occur in the
message. But care should be taken that ordinal numbers
are used when confusion is likely to arise , as in the case of
" X Hussars," which unless signalled " 10th Hussars " might
be taken to mean 10 hussars.
142. ABBREVIATIONS .
As naval and military ranks, official designations of appoint-
ments, commands, regiments, &c. , are usually written in
abbreviated form , they will therefore always be signalled
exactly as they have been written by the addressor.
142 A.
See Examples.
156 CHAP . VI. --STATION WORK
CHAPTER VI .
STATION WORK.
143 . DISPOSITION OF SIGNALLERS .
Signallers should be taught to at once arrange themselves

in such a position with regard to one another that the work
may be carried out with the utmost efficiency . It is impossible
to lay down hard and fast rules on this subject as the ground
and circumstances of each case must be considered , but the
general principle that the men should be as close together as
possible without hindering or impeding one another should
be borne in mind .
144. TERMINAL SENDING STATION.

The caller should be close to, and if possible, facing the
sender so that the latter may hear him distinctly and so that
the caller may check by eye or ear the signals made by the
sender. The sender must be in such a position that he can
work comfortably and has a suitable back-ground . When
using the flag he should , as a rule, stand with his back to the
wind, but whatever its direction , he must stand square to the
distant station . The answer reader should be close to both
the caller and sender so that the former can hear any check
letters , &c . , and compare them with the message, and so that
the latter may hear the word answered "" (indicating that
the last word has been answered and that he is at once to
proceed with the next) .
s 144. 157
Normal Arrangements.
(1) Flag and Telescope, men.
WIND MESSAGE.
SENDER
CALLER.
ANSWER READER.
(2) ANSWER READER.
CALLER.
SENDER.
(8) Flag and Telescope, 2 men.
SENDER
CALLER AND ANSWER

READER COMBINED.
2 men.
(4) Heliograph (sighting vane) or lamp .
SENDER CALLER. MESSAGE.

AND ANSWER READER.
With Heliograph the caller should read answer, the sender
should read " check letters. "
(5) Heliograph (Duplex) or Lamp and Telescope.

CALLER SENDER.
AND ANSWER READER.
158 CHAP. VI.- STATION WORK.
145. TERMINAL RECEIVING STATION.
The reader at the telescope must be comfortable and the
writer must take up such a position that he can distinctly
hear everything that is read ; as a rule , he should face the
reader. The answerer should also be close to the writer so
that he may hear the order to answer or to send any check
letters, &c. , as required, but his flag (if used) must not inter-
fere with the reader or his telescope .
Normal Arrangements .
3 men
(1) Flag and Telescope.
WIND. READER. MESSAGE.

WRITER.
ANSWERER.
(2)
ANSWERER.
WRITER.
READER. O
(8) 2 men.
READER.
WRITER AND
ANSWERER COMBINED.
s. 145. 159
2 men.
(4) Heliograph or Lamp (without Telescope) .
WRITER O
MESSAGE.
READER & ANSWERER
(5) Heliograph or Lamp (with Telescope) .

READER O
WRITER&ANSWERER
Normal Arrangements (Transmitting Word by Word).

5 men .
(1) Flags and Telescopes .
WIND. ANSWERER. MESSAGE.
READER
WRITER & CALLER.O
SENDER
ANSWER
READER.
(2)
ANSWER READER.
SENDER
WRITER & CALLER.
READER.
160 CHAP. VI.-STATION WORK .
146. TRANSMITTING STATION .
When the two portions of a transmitting station are work-
ing independently the men will be arranged as for terminals .
On other occasions, the same considerations will hold good,
bearing in mind the fact that, generally speaking, the duties
of writer and caller will be combined . In either case if flags
are being used , those of the sender and answerer or at the
different portions of the station must be clear of one another
and of the telescopes . When using heliographs or lamps the
sender and answerer can , as a rule, be brought quite close
together.
(3) Heliographs or Lamps and Telescopes.

MESSAGE.
READER.
SENDER. WRITER & CALLER.
ANSWER READER. ANSWERER.
4 men .
(4) Flags and Telescope in one direction only.
ANSWERER.
WIND MESSAGE.
READER.
WRITER & CALLER.
SENDER AND
ANSWER READER.
s. 147. 161
(5) Flags, Heliographs or Lamps.

SIGHTING MESSAGE
(
(READER &
VANE)
ANSWERER WRITER & CALLER
ANSWER READER
SENDER (DUPLEX).
3 men.
(6) Heliographs or Lamps.
MESSAGE
READER & ANSWERER.
-WRITER & CALLER.
SENDER & ANSWER

READER
147. RECEIVING THE MESSAGE FROM THE ADDRESSOR.
1. When a message to be signalled is handed in to a station
the signaller receiving it will at once read it through and
satisfy himself that all the words and figures in it are quite
clear. Should he be in doubt regarding any word, etc., he
will ask the addressor to make it clear, and to re-write it if
necessary. Likewise , should he notice any portion of the
message which if written in a different manner would
materially expedite or facilitate the signalling of the message,
he will point it out to the addressor and request him to alter
it, provided that course is agreeable to him.
2. The signaller will satisfy himself that the message is
correctly signed , in every case in space Z and in other spaces
when necessary .
3. Should the addressor wish to dictate his message the sig-
naller will write it down and hand the form to the addressor
to be read over by him and signed as a guarantee that he is
162 CHAP. VI.-STATION WORK.
satisfied as to its correctness . On rare occasions a message
may be given word by word by the addressor to the actual
sender of the message, in which case a copy should be made
and signed by the addressor before he leaves the station .
4. When a message is brought to a station by an orderly and
any correction as above is thought desirable the signaller in
charge of the station will use his discretion as to whether the
message should be sent back to the addressor for the same
to be made, or whether it should be retained for transmission .
As a rule, he should never alter or pencil over any part of
the message, but where words are obviously misspelt and in
similar cases he may re-write them at the foot of the message
form for the information of the caller whose attention should
be drawn to them.
"" ""
5. In the case of " Urgent Signals,' " Urgent Railway
and 66 Priority messages the signaller must satisfy himself
that all the required conditions are complied with .
6. Should any question afterwards arise as to the genuine-
ness , correct signalling, or delay of a message the signed
copy will be the voucher of the signaller in charge of the
station, and consequently signallers who accept messages for
transmission without attending to the above points incur
grave responsibility.
7. When the signaller is satisfied on the above points, he will
at once fill in the prefix, code time, office of origin, service
instructions if any, and generally speaking the number of
words, but when the signalling of the message can be at once
proceeded with, or the message is exceptionally long this latter
may be filled in later by the caller, in which case the number
of words will be signalled immediately after VE has been
sent.
8. When the above portion of the preamble has been filled
in, the form will be handed over to the caller of the party
working with the required distant station . He will arrange
it with any other messages he may have in their order of
dispatch in accordance with their prefixes and code times.
9. There should be no delay between the receipt of a
message from the addressor and its dispatch , and when, as is
s. 148. 163
frequently the case , the caller himself takes over the message
and there are no others having precedence over it, he will at
once direct the sender to call up the distant station if not
already in communication with it.
10. The addressors of Private and Press messages should be
informed if there is likely to be delay in forwarding the
same. If they cannot be dealt with on the day they are
tendered for transmission , they should not be accepted .
148. DUTIES AT A SENDING TERMINAL .
THE CALLER.
1. He will take charge of all messages waiting to be sent,
dispatching them according to their prefixes and codes .
2. He will superintend generally the sending of a message .
3. He will dictate each word or group to the sender . As
soon as the sender approaches the end of a word (generally
on the second or third letter from the end) , he will call out
the next word in its entirety ; long words and proper names
should also be spelt out, as well as any which , though alike
or similar in pronunciation, can be spelt in several ways, e.g. ,
"to," " two, " and " too." When a group is to be acknow-
ledged otherwise than withthe general answer, he will not
call out the following one until the correct check letters
have been received .
4. He will repeat or spell out to the sender any group
about which the latter may be 39in doubt and which he will
indicate by saying " after or " spell " respectively .
5. To assist himself to keep his place he must make a mark
against each word directly the acknowledgment to it has
been received .
6. When he has given out a group which has to be checked
back, he will check the letters as called out by the answer
reader with the message . He will not inform the latter of
the check letters he may expect .
7. He will recount the message as soon as he has ordered
VE (meaning " end of message ") to be sent .
8. He will complete the sent column, filling in the time as

soon as the answer reader reports RD (message read
correctly), from the distant station , he will also fill in the
call and date in the received column.
9. He will order RD to be answered with the general
answer.
10. He will when necessary use the signal " CC " as indi-
cated in Section 134.
11. In messages containing more than 50 words he will
make a distinct mark after every fifty .
149. THE SENDER .
1. He will pay attention to his heliograph, lamp or flag

and not to the distant station and make his signals distinctly
and in regular time ; if he is not read the fault probably lies
with himself.
2. He will send each word or group as ordered by the
caller. If a group is not answered (indicated by the answer
reader saying 66 answered 22 or calling out the check letters)
he will after a reasonable pause repeat the group without
any further order from the caller.
3. If he is in doubt regarding any word he will say to the
caller " after (last word he has sent)," or if he wishes a
""
word spelt out to him he will say spell.'
150. THE ANSWER READER.

1. He will keep his attention constantly on the distant
station.
2. On seeing the general answer made , he will call out
" answered " so that the sender may hear him and under-
stand that he can proceed to send the next word.
3. He will at once report all signals made by the distant
station and will read all check letters as sent, to the caller,
so that the latter may compare the same with the form .
s 151 . 165
151. DUTIES AT A RECEIVING TERMINAL.

THE READER.
1. He will keep his eye constantly on the distant station ;
when owing to the station being under strength he is also
answering on the heliograph he will from time to time look
to the vane to see that his shadow spot is in its correct
position.
2. He will read each signal or letter as he sees it and not
the words in their entirety .
3. Directly he sees the flag lowered from the " ready "" or
the light obscured he will say 66 group " to indicate the con-
clusion of the word to the writer.
4. He will on no account take on himself the duty of the
writer by ordering the answerer to answer a group , as
although it may be correctly read, omissions and errors are
almost certain to result therefrom .
5. He will not make any remarks regarding the words or
message whilst reading.
6. When necessary he will ask for a call for better light
to be made .
7. He will not quit the telescope or take his attention off
the distant station until he reads the acknowledgment to
RD (See Section 178) .
152. THE WRITER .
1. He will enter the message on the C. Form taking a
duplicate carbon copy, each part in its proper place in a
clear running hand (excepting those portions in " block " ).
Groups consisting
,‫ د‬of single letters , although not preceded
by the " block sign , should be entered in block letters .
2. Care must be taken, firstly to write on that form which
has spaces for the full preamble, and secondly to place the
carbon paper so that it only makes a copy from the " Service
Instructions " inclusive to the end. The carbon copy will
be delivered to the addressee and the original retained.
3. He will enter the code time, as signalled , and will
write the time in figures, corresponding to the code letters,
in the space provided after the words " office at."
4. He will enter the office of origin in full in the space

provided after the words " Handed in at the "
5. On hearing 66 group " from the reader he will under-
stand that the word or group is concluded and will, if satis-
fied as to its correctness, order the answerer to answer by
saying " Yes " (indicating the general answer) , or giving the
check letters as the case may be.
6. If not satisfied with a group he will make no remark ;
it will then be repeated by the sending station ; should the
same group be repeated three times alike it should be
accepted and answered .
7. In DD , DD messages he will enter each word on the
form with its repetition below it, and on conclusion of the
message will re-write it in the ordinary way.
8. He should note on a separate piece of paper, from time
to time, the total number of words received so that on con-
clusion of the message he knows at once whether the total
number agrees with that signalled in the preamble . In case
of messages containing more than fifty words this rule must
be carefully observed . These numbers must not appear on
the addressee's copy.
9. On hearing the reader say VE (end of message) he will
if satisfied that the message has been correctly received in
every particular , order the answerer to send RD. He will
similarly order the same acknowledgment to be sent when
satisfied that a portion of a message containing more than
fifty words has been correctly received . ""
10. If he is not satisfied , he will order " flag up or light
up "" on which the answerer will bring his flag to the
66 ready "" or expose his light ; the writer will then look
through the message and order the answerer to send the
necessary signals asking for any corrections required as
explained on pages 172-176 . When all corrections are obtained
and he is satisfied with the message he will order RD to be
sent.
11. He will fill in the received column entering the time
as soon as the answer to RD is received .
12. He is responsible generally for the receiving of the
message.
s. 153. 167
153. THE ANSWERER.

1. He is directly under the orders of the writer and will
at once comply with all instructions from the latter to
answer or send check letters or other signals .
2. When using the flag he will wait at the " Prepare
to Signal " for orders from the writer. When using the
heliograph or lamp he will attend to the same.
3. He will on no account send an answer or other signal
without getting the order to do so from the writer .
154. DUTIES AT A TRANSMITTING STATION OF FIVE MEN.
1. The same points must be attended to as laid down for
the duties at terminal stations except where they are
obviously inapplicable.
2. The reader telling the answerer to answer is one of the
most frequent causes of error at a transmitting station and
shows a want of discipline at the station ; it is better that
the sending station should repeat the word unnecessarily
than that it should be answered without orders from the
writer, who, being probably at the moment engaged in
calling out to the sender, does not enter it and hence arises
confusion and omission of words .
3. The combined duties of writer and caller are the most
important at a transmitting station . The signaller per-
forming them will be responsible generally for the transmis-
sion of the message, and instructions given by him must be
instantly complied with . He must bear in mind that his
first duty is to take down correctly every group that is
read ; though keeping the sender always supplied with
words, materially assists the speed with which a message is
transmitted, still this must yield in importance to the
necessity of avoiding omissions and errors. He should not
give the sender a word or group before he is satisfied as to
its correctness . If found more convenient he may call out
several words together. He will write the message exactly
as read neither substituting figures for letters in the code
time nor spelling out the office of origin or authorised
abbreviations in the text, but when he knows that the next
168 CHAP . VI.-STATION WORK .
station is the receiving terminal he will call out the prefix

altered accordingly. He will be careful to enter the message
on the proper form, that is to say,"'" if the prefix contains the
letter X " he will use the "" A Form and will take one
copy if the prefix contains the letter " S " he will use the
66 C Form and will take a duplicate copy by means of a
piece of carbon paper.
When using the " Moving Station " method the message
should be taken in duplicate on " C " Forms , unless it is
known that it is for transmission .
4. The sender will be careful not to ask for the word follow-
ing the one he is in the act of sending or has just sent, while
the writer is engaged in entering a word that is being read,
but will wait until the reading of that word is completed .
5. If the answerer sees that the writer is disengaged , and
has not ordered acknowledgment to the last word he will
draw his attention to the fact by saying 66 (the word) to
answer."
6. Should the sending on of the message drop behind the
receiving of it , it may be advisable for the answer reader to
assist the writer and caller by looking over his shoulder or
taking over a form when finished with , and calling out the
words, but the writer and caller still remains responsible for
the filling up of the form and that the message is correctly
transmitted.
155. DELIVERY AND FILING OF MESSAGES .

When the sending or receiving of a message has been
completed the caller or writer will hand over the form to
the signaller in charge of the station, who will satisfy him-
self that the message has been properly dealt with, and will
enter the necessary information in the " abstract of
""
messages, numbering the message in the upper right hand
corner. If the message is for delivery, he will enclose the
duplicate carbon copy in an envelope (A.F. C 377) and will
enter on it and on the form the words " By Signal." He
will address and fill in the necessary details on the envelope
and send it to the addressee . He will file the original copy
s. 156 . 169
of the message and will be responsible for the safe custody

of it and other forms. (See also Field Service Regulations ,
Part I, Section 18 (4) .)
156. SUCCESSION OF DUTIES .
In the foregoing part of this chapter the duties, etc.,
have been laid down so as to show clearly upon whom the
responsibility for every act in the sending or receiving of
a message devolves, but, as a rule, some of the duties
would necessarily be combined, and it would only be at
large or important stations that the signaller in charge
would not as a matter of course perform one of these duties.
It is most necessary, however, that all signallers should
thoroughly understand their respective responsibilities, and
that it is only by each man giving his whole attention to his
own work and not taking upon himself other duties that
real efficiency can be looked for. At the same time there
must be co-operation , not only within a station , but between
a station and those in communication with it. It will
generally be found that speed and accuracy go hand in hand,
and that speed although dependent on the actual rate of
sending and the capabilities of the readers also depends very
largely upon no time being lost between a duty and the one
following it, no matter whether the duties are combined or
each performed by a separate signaller . Thus : -
At a sending station between :
i . The caller spelling out the word to the sender so that
there will be no delay in his sending it on directly
" Answered " has been given by the answer reader.
ii. The sender hearing the word " Answered " from the
answer reader, and beginning to send the next
word.
iii. The answer reader seeing the answer given by the dis-
tant station and saying " Answered "" to the sender.
At a receiving station between :
i. The reader seeing the flag lowered or the light
obscured at the distant station at the completion of
word or group , and saying Group. "
66
ii. The writer hearing the_word Group given by the
reader and saying 66 Yes " if it is correct.
iii. The answerer hearing the order " Yes " given by the
writer and complying with it.
157. METHOD OF SENDING A MESSAGE .
1. The distant station, if communication is not already
opened , will be called up as described in Section 108. The
following are the parts of the message and the order in which
they are signalled.
i. Prefix Each of these is sent in one group
ii. Code time
iii. Office of origin . thus [ SM ], [ KFAM] , [LD ] .
iv. Service instructions , if any.
v. Number of words , spelt out, e.g. [hundred fifty four] .
This may be left until the end of the message (see Section
147) .
vi. Address TO.
vii. Break signal (see Section 178) .
viii. Text of the message .
ix. Break signal (see Section 178).
x. Address FROM.
xi. VE sent as a group of two letters , and signifying that
the message is concluded.
xii . Number of words (only when not signalled previously) .
2. Each word or group will be signalled separately, and
when necessary will be preceded or followed by any special
signals required. The addresses must be signalled exactly as
written.
3. Each word or group, including any special signals will
be answered before sending the following one .
158. THE ERASE SIGNAL.

1. Should a mistake be made at the sending station either
by the caller giving out a wrong word , group or sign, or by
the sender inadvertently making a mistake it will , if noticed ,
be rectified as follows :
The sender either on his own initiative or by order of the
s. 159. 171
caller will send the " erase "" signal, i.e. , a succession of dots
by Morse and the opposite to "L" by Semaphore, until
answered by itself. At the receiving"" station the reader
will notify it to the writer by saying erase " ; the writer
will then draw his pencil through the last word or portion of
a word and say " erased," this being an order to the answerer
to make the erase "" signal (as an answer to itself) , on
seeing
"" which, the answer reader at the sending station will
say erased," and thereby indicate to the sender that he is
to stop sending the erase and repeat the word or group in
which the mistake occurred .
2. Should a caller at a sending station find that check
letters as read by the answer reader do not agree with the
corresponding figures or letters on the form, he will at once
say erase, upon which the sender will send the erase
signal which will be answered as above , and when answered
the group will be sent again by the sender.
3. A receiving station sending a group of check letters or
any other word or signal should, when necessary, use the
erase signal as described for a sending station in para. 1 .
4. Should the receiving station ask for the " word before "
or " word after " a word, which is not in the original
message, the sending station will send the " erase "" signal,
meaning " there is no such word in the message. "
159. THE STOP SIGNAL "( PP). "
This signal is used by either the sending or the receiving
station to interrupt a message, or to send instructions , and
is only to be employed when absolutely necessary. It must
be at once complied with. At a transmitting station it
should not be sent on until it is seen by the following signal
that this course is necessary. It is answered by itself.
It is used in the following cases :
i . During a message , to send a message of higher prefix
(see Section 113).
ii. During a message to send one of the station signals
mentioned in Section 109 , except " call for light."
iii. During a message to check the first 50 , 100, or more
words (see Section 166 ) .
iv. At any time, to send any instructions, as a signaller's

message when this is unavoidable (see Section 176) .
v. The station that sends the stop signal is responsible
for resuming work on the interrupted message as
soon as possible, and will notify that it is about to
do so by sending " G," except as in (iii) above . This
will be acknowledged by the general answer, and the
sending station will then continue the former
message, commencing by repeating the last word
that was acknowledged before the interruption . At
the receiving station this will not be written down ,
but will be checked with the form and answered .
Should there be any discrepancy the message will
be continued in the ordinary way and any correc-
tions or repetitions required , will be asked for on its
conclusion as explained below.
160. METHOD OF CHECKING MESSAGES AND OBTAINING
CORRECTIONS.
The writer will satisfy himself in every case that the total
number of words received agrees with that signalled in the
preamble, and in messages other than cipher, he should
satisfy himself as far as possible that the message is
intelligible.
161. NUMBER OF WORDS INCORRECT .
1. Should he find that the number of words do not agree, he
will order the answerer to send the number of words in the
message as received by him ; suppose this to be " fifteen "
and the number signalled in the preamble " sixteen "; the
sending station on reading " fifteen " will acknowledge it
with the general answer, and the caller, who by this time
should have recounted the message, should now know which
number is correct ; should it be fifteen he will order the ""
sender to send [fifteen], meaning " fifteen correct, my error,'
which will be acknowledged by the general answer. The
receiving station if the message is correct in other respects
will then send " RD " which will be acknowledged by the
general answer, and the writer will alter the " 16 " in the
preamble to " 15."
s. 161 . 173
2. But if the caller on recounting is satisfied that sixteen is

correct he will at once commence calling out to the sender
the first letter or figure of every word or group , or portion
of a group that counts as a word (except the signal AAA
which is sent in full). The receiving station will check these
with their form , and if correct will answer each with the
general answer.
3. When the receiving station read an initial letter or figure
which does not agree with the group on their form, the
writer will say G," and this will be signalled by the
answerer ; it will signify to the sending station that they
are to send in its entirety the group of which the letter or
figure last signalled is the initial, or of which it forms a
part.
4. Groups thus signalled in full will be answered as
follows :
i. Groups which would usually be answered by the
general answer, will, when repeated in full, be
answered by the general answer, unless the receiv-
ing station wishes the following group to be
signalled in full . In this case the receiving station
will send " G instead of " T, " and the sending
station will signal that group in full . As long as the
receiving station wishes the groups to be sent in full
they will answer each group by " G." As soon as
they answer a group by the general answer, the
sending station will revert to initials .
ii . Groups which would usually be answered by check
letters are, when repeated in full answered by
check letters . If these are correct the sending
station at once sends the next initial letter or figure.
5. In thus checking a message the break signal, FI , FF, Z,
CC, and VE, will be signalled in their proper places and
answered , although they do not count as words .
6. Signs which count as a word will be signalled in full , e.g. ,
AAA, horizontal bar, etc. A sign which counts as a figure
will only be signalled if it happens to come as the first figure
of that part of a group which counts as a word, it will then
be signalled in full , for example, in checking " 314159, "
" FI.' " 3," " full stop " and FF are sent. In checking
" 23/12/09, " ""' FI, ” 66
“ 2, " oblique stroke " and " FF " are
sent. In checking " 23rd, "" " FI." " 2 " and " FF" are sent ,
in checking 1231 st," 66' FI, " " I," " FF " and " T " are
sent. These figures and signs counting as figures will be
answered in checking by the general answer.
7. By the above means omissions can be discovered and
entered in their proper place.
162. DOUBTFUL WORDS ; " WA " AND " WB."

1. Should the writer be in doubt regarding any word or
group he should ask the sending station to repeat it, employ-
ing for this purpose the signal " WA " (" word after " ) or
" WB" (" word before "). The procedure will best be
understood from the following example ::-
Portion of Correct Message. ""
attack fort by storm tomorrow
Message as Received .
66
attack fore by strong tomorrow
i. Receiving station sends [ WA] .
Sending station answers [ T] . i.e. , the general answer .
ii. Receiving station sends [ BY] .
Sending station answers [T]. N.B.-In the event of the
word not occurring in the""correct message, the send-
ing station will send the erase ," which the receiv-
ing station will answer by itself and then proceed to
obtain the correction by using some other word in
the message and working backwards or forwards as
below.
Sending station sends [ STORM ] .
Receiving station (a) answers [T] , or (b) sends [G].
Sending station (a) remains steady, (b) spells out the
following word in full , viz . : -[to morrow] . If “WB”
had been used the preceding word would have been
sent, and so on, working backwards .
Similarly the word " fore " would be corrected by using
" WB " in conjunction with the word (6 by "" or " WA " in
conjunction with " attack"" ; but in deciding which signal
s. 163. 175
to use, the shortest word should always be chosen provided

it leads to no ambiguity. Thus, in the above example to
obtain the word " storm," " WA " and " by " is used in
preference to " WB " and " tomorrow,' ," but if the word
‫وو‬
"" tomorrow "" didinnot,
by occurred some other portion of the message and
then the latter would be used. For
the above""reason these signals will not be used in conjunction
with the break."
2. In the event of a word or two being entirely omitted (as
would be seen by the number of words being wrong) and it
being quite clear from the context of the message at what
point they were omitted , the writer may ask for them in the
above manner, but, when there is any doubt, the method of
checking by initials should be used as being generally quicker
in the end.
163. REPEAT SIGNAL , " IMI."
Should any particular portion of a message be found

incorrect or incomplete the receiving station will ask for that
portion to be sent over again, which will be done in exactly
the same manner as when originally sent. For this purpose
the "' repeat signal " [IMI] sent as a group of three letters
will be employed . It will be acknowledged by the general
answer, upon seeing which the receiving station will signify
which part they require by signalling one of the following :-
i . Prefix .
ii. Code.
iii . Origin (meaning " Office of Origin ").
iv . Insns (meaning " Service Instructions " ).
v. Words.
vi . Preamble (when the whole of the above are required) .
vii. To ( meaning " Address To including 1st break " ).
viii . Text (including 2nd break) .
ix . From (meaning " Address FROM including66 VE ").
x. [All ] [After] [ ], (meaning send the
message over again from (such and
such a word) , as from there it is unintelligible " ) .
176 CHAP. VI.-STATION WORK .
xi. All (meaning " send the whole message over again, as
received by us it is unintelligible " ) .
Whichever of the above are sent, the sending station will
acknowledge it with the general answer and then comply
with the request.
164.
If during the correction of a message the receiving station
wishes the sending station to remain steady either because
they think all corrections have been obtained or because they
wish to ask for corrections at some other point of the
message, the writer will order " flag up " or " light up "
(i.e., the answer to " VE " ) , and as soon as the writer is
satisfied that the message is correct he will order " RD " to
be sent .
165. CORRECTIONS BY THE SENDING STATION .

1. A sending station can intimate that they are about to
supply a portion or part of a message which has either been
omitted or incorrectly sent, by alluding to it in the same
manner as a receiving station (omitting the signal " IMI " ) .
Should a station whilst sending a message notice that a word
in some previous part of the message has been omitted or
sent incorrectly, the message will be continued to the end
in the ordinary way and after VE has been sent the omission
should be supplied by means of the signals " WA " or
" WB ." Thus :-
Portion of Correct Message.
attack fort by storm to -morrow
Message as sent and received .
attack by storm to-morrow "
After VE.
i. Sending station sends [ WA].
Receiving station answers [ T] .
ii. Sending station sends [ ATTACK ] .
Receiving station answers [T].
iii. Sending station sends [ FORT].
Receiving station answers [T] . N.B. Should the
s. 166. 177
previous word, i.e., " attack, " not appear on the

form at the receiving station , they will neverthe-
less note it marginally and on " fort " being sent
will send " G " instead of the general answer, on
which the sending station will spell out the next
word in full and so on ; by this means the proper
place for the omission should be found .
2. Similarly, should the caller on recounting the message
after " VE," find that the number of words previously sig-
nalled in the preamble is incorrect and if the receiving
station has not already challenged his counting (by sig-
nalling the number of words as received by them) he will
order the correct number to be sent as though none had
been previously signalled .
166. CHECKING MESSAGES CONTAINING MORE THAN FIFTY

WORDS .
1. The message will be checked after every fifty words ; after
the sending station has received the answer to the fiftieth
word they will interrupt the message by the " Stop Signal "
and as soon as this is answered they will send [ fifty] , this will
be acknowledged by the general answer followed by " flag
up or light exposed " ; as soon as the receiving station are
satisfied with these fifty words (having asked for any cor-
rections as required) they will send " RD," which the send-
ing station will answer and then proceed at once with the
message. Similarly at the end of the next fifty words the
sending station will interrupt the message and send
[hundred] and so on.
At the receiving station the writer will either use a
separate form for each fifty words or else make a distinct
mark after each fifty words so that if the message is being
transmitted the same procedure may be carried out . He
will not enter the words " fifty, " etc. , on the form .
3. This is the only case in which the letter G will not be
sent, after sending the stop signal, before continuing the
message.
178 CHAP. VI.- STATION WORK .
167. EXAMPLES OF MESSAGE FORMS AS COMPLETED AT
STATIONS .
The following example shows how the message form
appears at the various classes of station. The Colonel
General Staff, 1st Division, is the addressor and his message
is handed in at the signal station at Bagshot at 11.30 a.m.
for transmission through Woking to Ordnance Officer, the
addressee, at Guildford . The message was delayed at its
start owing to the sun being clouded . It is marked
""
" Priority and the Colonel General Staff , 1st Division ,
being entitled so to mark it, is prefixed XB .
Form I. Shows the message as handed in.
II. Shows the form as completed after the sig-
nalling of the message has been completed
before filing at Bagshot.
"" III. Shows the completed form at Woking after
transmission.
I.
.
2121
C.
For
Arm m
y
F
.A
"
· orm
.
SIGNA
AND
MESS LS
AGES of age
No.
Mess
. harge
C.Words
Prefix- .
Code .
.m
:a/cois
onf
message
This at
Recd .m
.
Service
and
Origin
of
Office
.
Instructions Sent . ate-
DService
At- .m
. From
To FSof ranking
"( ignature
.")
Officer By
By
ORDNANCE OFFICER GUILDFORD
ΤΟ
Number
S*ender's Month
of
Day Number
to
reply
In AAA
3A5 tenth 2O1
s. 167.
500,000 rounds ammunition by

Send
marching by DORKING
convoy
i/c Major SCOTT-
GUILDFORD road
- ay
MONCRIEFF dto
From COLONELL GENERAL STAFF
Place 1ST DIV ALDERSHOT
Time 11.15 AM
now )(
corrected
forwarded
.-abes Z
may
above
The
GKing.S.
olonel
,1Cst
.
TDivision
Priority
to
authoriz
person
or
Addresso
of
Signatur ed
er
.
Censor .name
his
in
telegrap h
179
not
required
erased
be
should
line
T.if
*his
.
II
"
Aorm
.F Form
Army
2121
.C.
MESS
AND
SIGNA
. AGES
LS No.
of
Message
.,1
180
Prefix
LF ode
Ca,XB
.m. Words
.
Charge
. This messag
Office
Origin
of
and
Service 37 oon f
:/cais e Rec
at d .
.m
Instructi
. ons
Sent DateBG
BG Servi
. ce 10.1.1 1
At
12.
p.m7. From
Sun
clouded
till To
WK SF(of
"ignature
ranking
By
noon Pte
C,T.By
.rook Offic
"). er
ΤΟ
S*ender's
Number Day
Month
of reply
In
to
Number
3A5 tenth 21
O A
Send 500,000 rounds ammunition by
convoy marching by DORKING
GUILDFORD road i/c Major SCOTT-
MONCRIEFF dto
- ay
From COLONEL GENERAL STAFF
CHAP. VI.-STATION WORK .

Tim
. e
11.15 AM
The
above
may
forwarde
be
as
corrected
now
. ) d
(Z
Censor
. Signatur
Addresso
of
person
or
authoriz
to er
ed
telegrap
in
his
.name h
line
Tshould
erased
be
*not
ifhis ed
.requir
should
line
This orised required
.
III
FAorm
." 2121
.C.
Form
Army
MESSAGES
.
SIGNALS
AND ,19
Message
of
.No.
Prefix
C.m.
,aXB
LF
ode .
Words Charge
.
This
:message
a/cof
on
is Recd
at
p.m.
12.7
Service
and
Origin
of
Office 37
.
Instructions Date WK
Sent Service
. 10.1.11
BG BG
From
At
12.9
p.m.
till
clouded
Sun
GD
To FS"ofranking
( ignature .
,. ohnson
KJCpl
By
noon )
."
Officer
,RPte
PBy .
. latt
ORDNANCE OFFICER GUILFORD
ΤΟ
Number
Sender's Month
of
Day Number
to
reply
In AAA
3A5 tenth 2O1
3. 167.

-day
MONCRIEFF to
COLONEL GENERAL STAFF
From
.
Time 11.15 AM
corrected
now
.as
forwarde
be
may
above
The d(Z)
to
authorized
person
or
Addressor
of
Signature
.
Censor name
his
.in
telegraph
181
not
required
.erased
if
be
should
line
T* his
.
IV
.2
C123
Form
Army
Form
.C ARMY
SIGNALS
&
.TELEGRAPHS No.
of
Message
,0
3
182
Office
.Stamp
oapplication
Telegram
this
respecting
Inquiries
,m
same
the
of
repetition
for ray
;bhould
Office
Delivering
the
at
made
c.sbe
,&
delay
its
to
as
complaint
any
beut
made
.In
charge
officer
the
to
addressed
and
writing
in
must
form
this
case
either
complaint
or
inquiries
.such
accompany GD
Signal
By 10.1.11
Service
.
Instructions .s£ d.
Charges
clouded
Sun
noon
till to
pay
BAGSHOT
the
at
in
Handed
11.30
Office
A.M. P.M.
12.9
at
here
Received
ΤΟ
Number
Sender's Month
of
Day Number
to
reply
In
3A5 tenth 2O1 AAA
CHAP. VI.-STATION WORK.

MONCRIEFF .to
-day
Time 11.15 रा
AM
Time 11.15 AM
V.
2C
For
. 123y
Arm m
Form
.C .&
SIGNALS HS
TELEGRAP
ARMY ,3
Mess
of0 age
No.
Office
Stamp
.
Recd 37
W
LFAMords
ode
.,CSB
Prefix out
Sent
,or
WK
from At
Collecte 12.15
p.m.
Means
Orderly . d
.mith
,J.Pte
SBy GD
.
,. eid
ERSgt
By 1ile
mDistance out
Paid 10.1.11
Delivery.
.
Returned
Delivery.
Charges for
.
Instructions
Service 12.50
at
p.m.
till
clouded
Sun
noon
A.M.
11.30
Office
Handed
BAGSHOT
the
at
in Received
P.M.
12.9
at
here
ODRNANCE OFFICER GUILDFORD
ΤΟ
s. 167.
Number
*Sender's Mont
of h
Day Number
to
reply
In AAA
3A5 tenth 2O1
GUILDFORD road i/c Major SCOTT
MONCRIEFF to
-day
Time 11.15 AM
by
account
to
brought
be
are
delivery
on
collected
charges
other r
edirection
,oPorterage
RAll
paid
amount
and
charges
such
particulars
the
183
,aform
offace
tond
affixed
Stamps
means
"thend
Delivery
elivery
for
C harges
headed
aDspace
,iabove
.writing
in
forth
set
be
ton
are
out
required
not
if
erased
.line
be
should
T*his
184 CHAP. VI. STATION WORK.
Form IV. Shows one copy of the message as received and

delivered to the addressee at Guildford .
Form V. Shows one copy of the message as received and
filed in the signal station at Guildford.
168. EXAMPLE OF THE METHOD OF CHECKING PRECEDING

MESSAGE BY INITIALS .
The preamble , etc. , not being sent is not shown . The
correct message consists of 37 words, but the receiving
station having read 50000 for 500000 and having omitted the
word " to-day 22 find they have only 35 words and consequently
after " VE " :
Receiving station send [thirty five] , sending station answer
[T] and at once : —
Sending station send [ 0] Receiving station answer
22 22 "" [0] 39 ,, "" [T]
"" "" 99 "" T
"" "" "" ""
"" 99 [A] "" "" [T]
"" "" [FI] 99 "" [T]
[3] [T]
22 "" [ FF ] "" [T]
"" 99 [T] •3 ""
29 99 [ 0] 99 "" ""
99 "" [FI] 99
"" [2] 99 99
22 99 [FF] 99 "
39 [AAA] 99
‫وو‬ 99 [S] ""
[FI] ""
"" [5] 99 9.9
99 [0] 99 99
"" 99 [500000] 99 "" [EKKKKK ]
19 [FF] 99 ་་ [T]
"" 99 [R] "" "" İTİ
99 TAT 29 99 99 İTİ
"" 99 B1 39 "" IT
29 99 [C] 99
པ
s. 168. 185
Sending station send [M] Receiving station answer [T]

"2 [B] T
[Z] T
"" [D] 99
17 ""
"" [G] "" ""
99 99 , ‫[ د‬Z] ""
"" "" "" [R] ""
"" "" [I] 99 99
""
"" ""
99 [M] "" ""
99 "" 39
[S]
[ M] 99
99 [Z]
"" "" 99
99 "" [To day]
"" ""
[C]
"" [G]
[S] :"
[FI] ?? ""
[I]
[FF]
[D]
ΓΑΤ
[FI]
[1]
[FF ] "" [T
[A] "" [T]
[VE] [RD]
answer [T]
N.B.-If the writer on receiving the word " To-day " is
satisfied that the message is correct he should order RD to be
sent .
169. MULTIPLE ADDRESSES .
When it is required to send the same message to various "
officers, this may be done by means of " Multiple Addresses.'
Thus supposing Orders were issued for transmission by signal
to Station Staff Officer, C.R.A. , and C.0.0. , De Aar, " the
Address To would be signalled in this form, and at the receiv-
ing terminal, three carbon copies of the message would be
taken, each showing the address TO in full , so that each of
the addressees may know that the others have also received
a copy of the message. If it is deemed necessary a full stop
may be employed to separate the addresses . Each copy will
be sent out under separate covers addressed with one of the
above addresses only. The number of addresses will be
entered and signalled by the sending terminal as a " Service
Instruction," e.g. , in the above case thus, " three addresses."
170. REDIRECTED MESSAGES .
Should a signalling station be unable to deliver a message
owing to the addressee having left the post, camp, etc. ,
every effort should be made to find out where he has gone
and the signaller in charge of the station should redirect
the message and dispatch it as soon as possible . He should
enter in the " Service Instructions, " " Redirected from
"" (and date " if necessary), and
...at (time)
make any other alterations that may be necessary in the
preamble.
171. UNDELIVERED MESSAGES .
If from any cause, such as communication having broken
down or a terminal station being unable to find the addressee ,
the addressor must always be informed if his message cannot
be delivered ; transmitting or receiving terminals should
send the sending terminal an SG or XG message to this
effect, the signaller in charge at the latter station being
responsible that the addressor is informed as soon as possible .
When communication, etc. , is restored the addressor should
again be informed so that if he still desires it, the message
may now be sent . If the message were received from a
telegraph office that office would likewise be informed.
s. 172. 187
172. ENQUIRIES REGARDING MESSAGES .

When it is necessary to refer to a message that has already
been dealt with, it may be described by giving in the follow-
ing order (as briefly as possible) the name of the addressor ,
the name of the addressee, the code time and the date (if
previous to that on which the enquiry is being made) . Thus
supposing a message handed in by " Bde . Maj . R.F.A. ,
DEVONPORT " for " C.R.A., WEYMOUTH " at 10.23 a.m.
on the 25th of the month is referred to on the 26th ; it
might be described as " [ Message] [Bde. ] [Maj .] [to] [C. ]
[R. ] [ A. ] [ KDWAM] [twentyfifth]." Or again it may be
more convenient, in the case of a 66 moving station "" message
for instance (see Section 129), to quote the " Sender's No. "
173. MESSAGES TO AND FROM TELEGRAPH OFFICES .

1. If a message is passed from a telegraph office to a signal
station for further transmission, the words " From telegraph
at.. " followed by the time and, if the message has
been unduly delayed , the date should be entered as a " Ser-
vice Instruction. "
2. If a message received by signal is to be further transmitted
by telegraph, a carbon copy will be taken and passed to the
telegraph office, the original being retained by the last signal
station dealing with the message, and receipt obtained by
them .
174. THE OBLITERATOR SIGNAL .

1. This is used to cancel a message which is actually being
sent or which has just been sent. It will be made by send-
ing " WW " as a group of two letters (after sending the stop
signal if necessary) and will be answered by itself . The
message or portion of a message to which it refers will be
retained and the word " Cancelled " written conspicuously
across it.
2. In the event of an addressor wishing to cancel a message
which has been previously sent, he should be requested to
hand in a fresh message to the addressee , embodying this in
its text.
175. BATCH WORKING .
On certain occasions when the pressure of work is great or
when a large number of messages have accumulated and
cannot be dispatched in the ordinary way without loss of
time, the following system may be adopted . The stations
in communication with one another will arrange by a PP
message (see below) to each send a batch of messages con-
tinuously , the number in the batches being agreed upon.
Stations will send and receive batches alternately, thus
avoiding the delay which would be caused by repeatedly
having to discriminate between prefixes , prior codes , etc.
Each message will be checked on its conclusion in the
ordinary way, and as soon as RD " has been acknowledged
the next message will be at once commenced . If an urgent
message were handed in whilst batch working, the message
in hand would be interrupted as already explained . When ,
all the messages have been sent, a station will signal " NN '
to show that no more messages are coming .
176. SIGNALLER'S MESSAGES .

1
It may happen that it is desirable to give a distant station
fuller instructions than can be conveyed by any of the station
signals, the various uses of which have already been
explained . Such instructions should , as a rule, be sent in
the form of a " SG " or " XG " message, they will then be
written down and the form retained in the ordinary manner ,
but, in rare cases, and then only by order of the senior sig-
naller present , the stop signal (PP) will be made. This will
be answered by itself and the instructions, etc. , sent with-
out any other preliminary signal . The signals VE and RD
will be used as usual . If a reply to a question, etc. , is at
once sent, it is unnecessary to repeat the signal " PP."
Such messages need not be written down .
177. SEMAPHORE SYSTEM .

The method of sending on the Semaphore system will be
the same as when using Morse, except for the necessary
s. 177. 189
differences shown in the 3rd and 4th columns of Section 178.

It should be borne in mind , that the general answer will be
made by the Morse system. When signalling with the
mechanical semaphore, a flag will still be used for answering.
The caller and writer should stand immediately in rear of
the sender and reader respectively, so that they may be clear
of the flags and yet close enough to be heard and to hear
the latter distinctly.
1842 N
Si 190A
No. Name.
Morse.
w answered.
1 General Answer " T"
2 Preparative etc.
al answer .
3 Erase etc.
4 Obliterator WW same signal.
"" ""
NAVAL AND MILITARY PENDANT.

s. 179. 191
CHAPTER VII .
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALLING BETWEEN THE

NAVY AND ARMY .
179. SYSTEMS USED.
Signalling between Navy and Army can be carried out by
the Morse (flag- waving, heliograph, searchlight , or lamp), or
Semaphore system.
180. PROCEDURE- ROYAL NAVY.
The procedure in working by the Royal Navy is the same
as that used in the Army, with certain exceptions, which are
stated in the following sections .
181 . CHARACTERISTIC SIGNALS FOR OPENING COMMUNICATIONS .
1. Two special signals are established for distinguishing
inter communication between the two services when wishing
to call one another up, viz.::-
2. By day. The " Naval and Military " Pendant, which is
always to be hoisted by H.M. ships wishing to communicate
with a shore station. It will also be used by any shore
1.6 16 %<2.0
7-
NAVAL AND MILITARY PENDANT .

192 CHAP. VII.- INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALLING, &c .
station equipped with a flag-staff and possessing this pendant

when wishing to attract the attention of H.M. ships.
The designation " shore station " includes those estab-
lished by a landing party from H.M. ships as well as military
stations.
3. By night or by day. The " Military " sign, which is the
letter X," made either by Morse or Semaphore. This
sign is to be used at night, and during daylight by stations
which have no flag-staff or military pendant available, to call
up an unknown ship or station (see Section 184) , if the " Call
Sign of the ship or shore stations is known (see Section 183) ,
that will be used, instead .
182. METHOD OF USING THE MILITARY PENDANT.

Ships, also stations equipped with a flag-staff and military
pendant, will use the military pendant in the following
manner : -
When calling up. -To attract attention it will be hoisted
close up ; as soon as the station ceases to send messages, it
will be hauled down , that is to say it will only be hoisted by
the Sending " station, whether ship or shore .
183. CALL SIGNS .

1. When two or more ships or stations are in sight of each
other, each ship and station should be allotted a special call
signal consisting of two letters, the first of which being
invariably the letter " X." These calls are to be arranged
by the officers in charge of the signalling arrangements of
the two services respectively, and are to be mutually made
known .
2. The Senior Naval Officer's ship will always be allotted
the call signal " XA."
3. Should a shore station wish to make a general signal to
H.M. ships , it will generally be found best to call up the
Senior Naval Officer's ship , or any other convenient ship
and pass the message to her with a request (made by a "PP"
message) that it may be made general.
s. 184. 193
184. TO CALL UP AN UNKNOWN SHIP OR STATION .

To call up an unknown ship or station the same procedure
as detailed in the foregoing sections will be adopted . When
the answer has been made the ship or station desiring
communication will send the signal " RU. " Each ship or
station addressed will reply to this signal by sending the
answer and then its name in full followed by any call which
may have been allotted to it.
185. TO CALL UP INDIVIDUAL SHIPS OR STATIONS .

1. Ships or stations whose calls are known to one another
will be called up by their call letters. Should the ships or
stations not have been allotted calls, but nevertheless be
cognisant of one another's names, these latter may be used.
2. Should there be any delay on the part of any ship or
station in responding to a call, any other ship or stations
observing the same should endeavour to make known to the
former that it is being called up by the ship or station
specified .
186. METHOD OF CALLING UP INDIVIDUAL SHIPS AND

STATIONS.
In addition to attracting attention by means of the military
pendant when it is made use of, individual ships or stations
will be called up in the manner described below.
The call signal of the ship or station required will be
repeated as often as may be necessary. As soon as the ship
or station perceives its call, it will answer by sending its
own call once. If the Senior Officer's ship, whose call is
"XA," wishes to communicate with a military station whose
call is " XZ," the former will send " XZ , XZ, XZ , &c ." As
soon as the latter sees this it will send " XZ." The Senior
Naval Officer's ship will then send " XA," signifying from
" XA." The military station will then send "G " signify-
ing " Go on," or if not ready, " MQ " meaning " Wait."
194 CHAP . VII.-INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALLING, &c.
187. PREAMBLE.
1. The prefixes " SA " and " XA " are not used.
2. With both Morse and Semaphore the office of origin will
always be signalled in full, not by its " station call. " It will
always be sent as one group, even though it may consist of
several words.
188. FIGURES .
1. Using Morse.-Figures written in a message are always
sent by means of the 66 Long Numerals "" (the " Numerals "
are never used when working with the Royal Navy).
Groups of ordinary figures occurring in a message are not
checked, but are acknowledged by the general answer.
Groups of cipher or code numerals are checked by repeat-
ing the " Long Numerals."
2. Using Semaphore. -Figures will always be signalled by
spelling them out in words. They will be signalled in the
same group as written ::-
i . Thus " 200 " will be sent as [two nought nought],
" 197684 " as [one nine seven six eight four] , each
in one group and counting as in Morse, viz.:
5 figures to one word. They would both be
written down as figures .
The receiving station must take care not to answer
before the end of a group, otherwise the number
might be split-thus [ 197684] might be received
as [197] [684].
If the sending station see that a group has been
answered too soon they should erase it and send
it again.
ii . A decimal
66 pointpoint
"" will always be signalled by the word
which will count as a figure-Thus ,
" 4.7 " is sent in one group, viz.: [ four point
seven] , it counts as one word, " 31415 " is sent
as one group, viz.: [three point one four one five] ,
it counts as six figures, hence as two words.
iii. Times will always be spelt out : -Thus " 2.30 " is sent
as [two thirty], "7.45 " as [seven fortyfive], each
one group and one word.
s. 189. 195
3. When using either Morse or Semaphore.—

i . Ordinal members will always be spelt out however
they may be written : -Thus, " 3rd " is sent
[third], and " 94th "" as [ninetyfourth ] .
ii. The date written by the sender of a message in the
space provided for it on the form will always be
sent by spelling out the day of the month and
omitting the month and year : -Thus, " 18th " or
" 18/5/10" would both be sent as [ eighteenth ] .
iii. The signals to denote figures , &c. (viz .: FI, FF,
Alphabetical and numerical signs) are never used .
189. CIPHER AND CODE.
The word code applied to letters or numerals, refers to
certain groups of letters or numerals contained in " Naval
Code Books," it must not be confused with " Code Time."
Groups of " Code " letters or numerals, are treated in
• exactly the same manner as cipher . With both Morse and
Semaphore, groups of cipher or code will always be sent in
the same groups as written by the originator. On no account
will they be divided into groups of five , which would destroy
the sense of the message.
190. MORSE SIGNALS USED WITH SEMAPHORE.

The Morse method of calling up, viz. , a succession of X's
will usually be employed even when the Semaphore system
is going to be used for the message.
191. GENERAL NOTES .
1. The " Moving Station " method should be adopted
whenever possible. (See Section 129.)
2. The normal rate of signalling between Navy and Army
may be taken as eight words a minute by Morse and fifteen
words a minute by Semaphore.
3. The expression 66 General Answer 99 should never be
used when working with the Navy, as it has with them
another meaning. The word " Answer " should be used
instead .
196 CHAP. VII .- INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALLING, &o.
192. THE ERASE.
When a word or group has been erased and the erase signal
acknowledged , the sending station must repeat the last word
which has been correctly received , and not send the word in
which the mistake occurred , until that word has been
answered.
Thus-in sending, "" move to Portsmouth at noon," the
sender makes a mistake in the word at "" and erases it.
When the receiving station sends the erase, in reply, the
sender will send " Portsmouth " and on receiving the answer
will send " at " and continue the message.
193. MISCELLANEOUS MORSE SIGNS AND SIGNALS USED IN
SIGNALLING BETWEEN NAVY AND ARMY.
The usual miscellaneous signals are used when working
with the Navy except :
i . The signal MM to separate whole numbers from
fractions is not used, fractions are sent as decimals.
Signallers should draw the attention of the originator
of a message to this.
ii. After receiving VE a receiving station do not hold up
their flag or open their light. They either send
" RD "" or ask for repetitions .
iii. The break sign [ ii ] is used with Morse as well as with
Semaphore, the signal [ . -] is never used .
194. COMMUNICATION WITH THE ARMY EMBARKED IN
TRANSPORTS .
1. When military signallers are available in Transports and
communication is desired between the military in transports
and H.M. ships , the method of calling up is to be the same
as previously described.
2. During war, arrangements will probably be made
whereby a military signaller is constantly on watch in such
transports .
3. No communication , however , is ever to be made by trans-
ports, especially at night, without the express sanction on
each occasion of the naval officer in charge, as, under certain
circumstances, it might be a matter of some danger to make
a visual signal .
s. 195. 197
PART II.
CHAPTER VIII .
ESTABLISHING AND WORKING A SIGNAL STATION

IN THE FIELD.
195. CHARGE OF STATION .
The station should be placed, according to its importance,
in charge of either an officer, non-commissioned officer or
thoroughly qualified signaller. He will be responsible not
only that communication is maintained, but for all details
relating to the party composing the station.
196. POSITION FOR STATION .
In selecting the exact position for the station , anxiety to
commence work must not prevent such time and care being
taken that no subsequent rearrangement will be necessary,
and the following points, enumerated in order of their rela-
tive importance, must be taken into consideration : -
i. Obtaining Communication .
ii. Concealment.
iii. Backgrounds .
197. COMMUNICATION .
1. The position selected should have a clear view to those
stations with which communication is to be opened as well
as those with which it is already established , and to points
with which it is likely communication will be required later.
198 CHAP. VIII.—ESTABLISHING , &c. , A SIGNAL STATION .
For this reason the highest ground should be looked for, con-
sistent with the considerations indicated under (ii) and (iii) .
The immediate vicinity of camps, roads, traffic, smoke, lights,
dust and mists should be avoided as tending to hinder com-
munication .
2. Stations should take up positions from where they are
most likely to be quickly seen and picked up, e.g., near
prominent buildings, haystacks, distinctive clumps of trees
or solitary trees, and open spaces. They should, when
possible, be near the roads, paths, railways, and telegraphs,
so as to be easily got at from these other means of communi-
cation. When these conditions conflict with one another the
signaller must use his judgment as to which is the most
important under existing circumstances .
3. Under certain considerations it may be impossible to obtain
the necessary view from the ground level ; in these cases the
roofs of buildings , especially of churches with square towers,
may prove useful ; or it may even be necessary to add
artificially to the available height by erecting some form of
" observatory." This additional elevation can often be
supplied from means at hand such as tables , carts, &c. , but
it might be advisable at fixed stations to arrange for some-
thing of the nature of scaffolding to be erected in thickly
wooded countries a platform might be made in the branches
of large trees, and, if necessary, the surrounding foliage cut.
It should be remembered that often a difference in height of
only a few feet will enable visibility to be obtained between
two points which could not otherwise be put into communica-
tion .
4. Care must be taken that the apparatus used will be
entirely visible, and for this purpose the eye should be placed
on a level with the lowest instrument (generally the telescope)
to see that nothing obstructs the view to the distant station.
5. Mists and fogs can sometimes be overcome by moving on
to higher or lower ground, as they are generally only of a
certain thickness . In the case of ground mists which rise
regularly at certain times of the day, it may be possible to
avoid them by erecting an observatory on the lines indicated
above.
s. 198. 199
198. CONCEALMENT .
1. The necessity for concealment is due to consideration
for : -
i. The secrecy of the work,
ii . The secrecy of the dispositions of the troops,
iii. The safety of the party,
and varies more or less on the proximity or distance of the
enemy and the apparatus employed .
2. In the field , signallers should invariably take advantage
of all cover which may be afforded by walls, hedges , the forma-
tion of the ground , &c. , and when necessary artificial cover
such as a trench or sandbag parapet should be devised,
although it may only give protection to a portion of the
party.
3. It will frequently happen that with a view to opening
communication a position is taken up on a skyline, but when
communication has been established , a lower position will
probably prove equally good and should be moved to.
4. When selecting a position from which to work a transmit-
ting station, when possible, ground should be chosen which
will not necessitate the party being broken up , or if this
must be, which will separate the different parts by the least
space. When concealment is of primary importance, it may
be necessary to split up a transmitting station and keep both
parts on the reverse slopes of a conical knoll, rather than
keep the party together on the top of the higher ground ,
where they would probably be exposed .
199 . BACKGROUNDS .
1. The object to be kept in view is to obtain as great a con-
trast as possible between the signals and the background
against which they will be seen. The background should be
unbroken and uniform in colour.
2. Woods, especially of pine trees, ploughed fields , rocks, and
dark buildings form the darkest backgrounds, and skylines ,
snow and water the lightest . The greater the distance
between the background and the observer, the lighter will it
appear, thus a very distant belt of trees may appear only a
200 CHAP . VIII.-ESTABLISHING, &c. , A SIGNAL STATION .
little less light than the sky itself. The less the distance
between the object displayed and the background , the sharper
will be the contrast. The appearance of flags and back-
grounds are altered considerably by the clearness of the
atmosphere, the strength of the light and the direction in
which it strikes them ; dark objects absorb light, whereas the
lighter an object is the more light it reflects, consequently
when the sunlight is shining on a flag in such a way that it
is reflected towards the distant station, the flag will appear
lighter than when the sun is behind the flag , and its light
therefore reflected away from the distant station. In order
to get the greatest contrast between a white flag and a dark
background, the former should be in a strong light, and the
latter in shadow.
3. When it is impossible to get a uniform background for the
flag throughout its wave, it should be arranged that at any
rate there is a strong contrast between it and the background
when at the " Ready."
4. Generally speaking, when there is any doubt regarding
the nature of the background, it will be found that a white
flag, owing to its powers of reflection , will be more easily read
than a blue one.
5. Practice alone will enable signallers to appreciate the effect
of changes of light on backgrounds and flags, and to under-
stand that with the variations of light it may be necessary
for a flag of a different colour to be used at a distant station.
6. When using the heliograph or lamp , the question of back-
ground is not so important, but a dark one should be selected
if possible, and this is especially necessary when using the
lamp on a bright moonlight night. It should , moreover ,
always be remembered that in the event of the sun becoming
clouded the flag will have to be resorted to .
7. When the sun is low and behind a station it will increase
the difficulty of making out signals on whatever apparatus
they are being sent, but this may be mitigated to some extent
by the reader and his telescope being placed in shadow.
8. It should be remembered that the background to a station
is not necessarily the colour of the ground in its immediate
vicinity, but may be that of the features of the country some
s. 200. 201
miles behind it ; in the same way a signaller on a housetop

must not conclude that he is working with a sky background.
9. To ascertain the colour of the background on which the
signals will appear to the distant station let two men take a
flagpole, each holding it in his right hand and looking along
it in opposite directions , let the one direct it towards the
distant station, while the other observes the background to
which it points. By aligning a telescope on the distant
station and then looking through the wrong end of it, some
idea of one's own background may also be obtained .
10. It may be advisable under certain circumstances to
improvise a suitable_background . For example, a heliograph
on a hillside covered with snow might be difficult and trying
to read, but this difficulty could be lessened by erecting a
screen of dark blankets, &c., behind the instrument ; or
again, on a dull day, it might be desirable to use the lamp
instead of the flag and by placing it in a tent with a dark
lining or erecting a dark screen round it, it will be found to
lessen the difficulties of reading it from the distant station .
200. INSTRUMENTS .
1. All equipment should be periodically examined , and always
before starting out to a station to see that it is in good order
and complete, and enough equipment should always be taken
out to provide for all possible requirements .
2. The instruments must be set up having due regard to the
positions the signallers will occupy and their comfort in
working them. As soon as the site for the station is decided
upon, the heliograph and telescope should both be set up and
aligned ready for use. It is extremely annoying for a station
that has had to resort from the heliograph to the flag to be
kept waiting until the telescope at the distant station has
been focussed and aligned .
3. Whenever possible , the heliograph should be used in
preference to the flag as offering many more advantages both
as regards secrecy and manipulation , but on cloudy days the
flag should be at hand, so that it may at once be resorted to
on the sun failing.
202 CHAP. VIII.—ESTABLISHING , &C . , A SIGNAL STATION .
4. Care should be taken that there is nothing in the vicinity

of the station such as fires, glass roofs, &c. , the light from
which might be confused with that from the lamp or helio-
graph. When an extra light as above, or owing to two
heliographs or lamps being necessarily close to one another,
hinders and disturbs the reader, it will often be found
possible to exclude the extra light by using a telescope,
aligned so as to include only the light which it is desired to
read.
5. When communication has been established and work is
temporarily suspended, the direction of the distant station
should be noted by some conspicuous landmark, or by align-
ing two or three pickets or a few stones ; this should always
be done during daylight, when it is known that the same
station is to be occupied at night, as much time is thus
economised in aligning the lamps, telescopes , &c. (see also
Section 88).
6. Spare equipment must be kept tidily together ; if
scattered, it is almost certain to be broken or lost.
201. OPENING COMMUNICATION .
1. Every effort should be made to attract the attention of the
distant station, and with this object flags of both colours
should be used ; if the direction of the distant station is
known accurately, the heliograph should be aligned and the
station called up, a steady light being shown from time to
time, to enable the distant station to align their heliograph .
But if the approximate direction only, of the distant station
is known, the heliograph should be flashed in the general
direction, and if the duplex mirror is not required , it may
also be used on the chance that the flashes may be seen ; or
should there be no heliograph available, an ordinary piece of
looking glass or a shaving mirror can be made use of, and a
station on seeing a flash should not therefore take it for
granted that the heliograph is going to be used.
2. Although a particular site may have been selected to signal
from , the party should (if it is found impossible to obtain
commuication otherwise) be scattered on the chance that one
of them may be seen .
L
8. 202. 203
3. Any other means of attracting the attention of the

distant station which may be suggested by local circumstances
should be tried when necessary .
202. PICKING UP THE DISTANT STATION.

1. Stations, when possible , should be provided with maps of
the surrounding66 country, and on arrival at the station the
map should be set " as follows :·-
i. With Compass : -If the magnetic north line is shown on
the map, lay the compass over it (produced if necessary) and
without disturbing the compass, turn the map slowly round
until the north end of the north point on the map is exactly
under the north end of the needle .
If the true north line only, is shown, and you know the
local variation of the compass , plot the magnetic north on
the map with the protractor and proceed as before. If you
have no protractor, lay the compass on the true north line,
and turn the map until the line makes with the needle an
angle equal to the variation, and on the correct side of it.
Then, with a variation 17° W. the side sheet line of an
ordnance survey 1-inch map, would have to be turned till
17° to the right (or east) of the needle of the compass.
ii. By Objects -A map can be set by objects on the ground
without using the north point or compass . Identify your
position on the ground where you stand, or some point
marked on the map. Also identify on the map some distant
object you can see. Join these two on the map by a straight
line . Then turn the map about the point marking your posi-
tion till this line points to the distant object.
The map being set, a flagpole should be laid on it, so as
to pass through the points representing your own position
and that of the distant station . Then lay the telescope on
some distant object in the country, in prolongation of the
flagpole, and judged to be approximately the distance away
of the distant station, as measured from the map, and care-
fully and thoroughly examine the country in that direction
by traversing and elevating and depressing the telescope
slowly.
204 CHAP. VIII.- ESTABLISHING, &C. , A SIGNAL STATION .
2. When searching for moving stations whose position is not

known, the usual indications of troops such as dust, smoke,
&c. , should be looked for and the neighbourhood carefully
swept ; binoculars proving particularly useful for this pur-
pose.
203. MOVING SIGNALLERS AT A DISTANT STATION .

Instructions to a signaller at a distant station to move
should only be given when absolutely necessary. When
viewed through the telescope, it may seem quite practicable
to ask a signaller to move a few feet one way or the other,
but in reality this, owing to the formation of the ground ,
may not be possible, e.g., a signaller standing on the edge
of a precipice may be asked to move lower. A station should
trust those with whom they are in communication to make
the best possible arrangements under the circumstances , of
which, it must be remembered , they alone have full know-
ledge. When a station moves, it must inform all others prior
to doing so, and indicate the direction in which it is going ,
and, if possible , the approximate point, and time at which it
will again call up. It must also inform the Senior Com-
mander or General Staff Officer in the vicinity, and any tele-
graph station which may be in the immediate neighbourhood.
204. ORDERS FOR SIGNALLERS AT STATIONS .

The following orders should be thoroughly known and
acted upon by all signallers , but it is the duty of the sig-
naller in charge of the station, no matter what his rank, to
see that they are carried out.
i. A constant look-out is to be kept, both to ensure the
safety of the party and to watch for " calls " from all direc-
tions . A sentry, provided with binoculars, should be detailed
for this duty, and should be relieved every two hours.
(When the station is close to a piquet or other troops , the
sentry furnished by them may be instructed to act in this
capacity, in which case it would be unnecessary for the sig-
nallers to supply an additional sentry).
s. 204. 205
ii . On the sentry observing calls from a distant station,

he will at once warn the signallers detailed for duty ; they
will immediately proceed with the work of opening communi-
cation and sending or receiving messages as may be neces-
sary.
iii. Every man is to confine his attention to the duty for
which he has been detailed ; rigid discipline is to be enforced ,
and every point, however trifling it may seem, must be
strictly carried out .
iv. While work is actually going on, all unnecessary talking
or moving about is strictly prohibited .
v. All attempts to attract the attention of a distant station
are to be continuous until replied to.
vi. All requests from another station for better light ,
different coloured flags, &c . , should be instantly obeyed with-
out argument or delay.
vii. Instruments are to be kept clean and in good order .
They must be firmly set up, and when possible, a telescope
should be kept aligned on each distant station . All prepara-
tions for night work (especially aligning telescopes) should be
made before daylight fails .
viii . Signallers must understand the confidential nature of
their work, and that it is a serious military crime to disclose
messages or their meaning without authority.
ix. All unauthorized persons are to be prevented from
loitering within sight or hearing of the station , or in any way
hindering the work thereat.
x. The heliograph is to be used whenever possible, but no
delay must occur when it becomes necessary to resort to the
flag.
xi. The instructions regarding messages being in writing .
signed, marked " Priority, " &c. , must be rigidly carried out.
xii. All rules for the signalling of the message, such as no
alterations being allowed , must be obeyed, and the message
must be carefully checked ; in no case is the acknowledg-
ment " RD " to be sent until repetitions of all words or
groups regarding which there is the slightest doubt have been
asked for.
1842 O
206 CHAP. IX .-ESTABLISHING AND OCCUPYING A LINE , &o.
xiii. The forms must be properly completed and the neces-

sary entries made in the " Abstract of Messages " if possible
as the messages are dealt with.
xiv. All message forms and receipts for messages must be
carefully preserved ; if there is a likelihood of their falling
into the enemy's hands they should , however, be destroyed.
XV. A diary should be kept by each permanent station, in
which should be entered each day, names of stations ,
columns, &c., with which communication has been opened ,
any casualties, state of weather, and other information
which may prove of future service ; lines of signalling com-
munication which have actually been established , as well as
those which are possible and likely to be required , should be
marked in on the map.
CHAPTER IX.
ESTABLISHING AND OCCUPYING A LINE OF

STATIONS DELIBERATELY.
205. PRELIMINARY STUDY OF MAP.

If available , a reliable map of the country should be con-
sulted, but it must be remembered that as far as visual
signalling is concerned , it is impossible to say from a map
(although it be on a moderately large scale) that two definite
points are visible to one another, and only the approximate
positions for stations can be thus selected ; in deciding upon
s 200 . 207
these the following points must be borne in mind :- :

i. As regards visibility, cultivation and woods will often
present difficulties and should be avoided ; open high
ground, and conical in preference to flat-topped
hills, should be looked for. "" Survey points "" often
afford a clue to the selection of stations . Consider-
able ranges of vision may sometimes be obtained
along straight lengths of railway or along a valley
which runs in the required direction, or in the latter
case a zigzag chain of stations from side to side can
often be established on the hills enclosing it.
ii . The distance between the stations will depend upon the
range of the available instruments and the general
state of the atmosphere. In countries unfavourable
to the employment of the heliograph, an average
distance of 5 to 8 miles between stations is the
longest that can be more or less relied upon ; with
the heliograph the distance between stations is
practically only limited by the question of the
visibility of the points to be occupied.
iii. Stations should be as easy of access as possible and
should therefore be close to the routes followed by
troops, convoys , &c.
206. ESTABLISHING A CHAIN OF STATIONS .
1. The only sure way of establishing a chain of stations is
to work forward from a point already occupied to one in
front and so on, thus prolonging an already existing line.
2. Having carefully studied the map, fix upon a desirable
initial position, and when possible assemble the signallers to
occupy the stations at that point .
3. Compare the lie of the country with the map, and pick out
on the ground the position of the next forward station already
roughly fixed on the map. If this is obviously unsuitable
owing to the nature of its surroundings or of the intervening
country, determine upon a more desirable position, and
taking its bearing and estimating or taking its range, mark
it on the map .
208 CHAP . IX . —ESTABLISHING AND OCCUPYING A LINE, &c.
4. Establish a station at the initial position and instruct a

party of signallers to occupy the proposed forward station,
but before allowing them to proceed to it, the position of the
station should be pointed out both on the ground and on the
map ; they should : -
i . Note the bearing of the forward station and the back
bearing of the initial station .
ii. Form an impression of the initial station as it will
appear from the forward station , and for this pur-
pose should particularly note any landmark, such as
distinctive clumps of trees, towers and buildings in
its vicinity and its situation in regard to them.
iii. Thoroughly understand the route to be followed and
the nearest means of approach to the forward
station .
iv. With the aid of the telescope note any natural features
or landmarks in the vicinity of the forward station
which will guide their approach to it.
v. Compare watches and agree upon the approximate time
at which it is expected they will arrive at their
station and call up .
5. They will, when necessary, verify their advance by taking
a back bearing to the station they have left, and if the dis-
tance is great they should , on an opportunity offering itself.
open temporary communication with the initial station and
report progress .
6. On arrival at their station, they will at once proceed to
open communication .
7. In a similar manner the next forward station will be
selected and occupied and the chain thus extended.
8. If men are available, it is an additional security to
occupy provisionally more than one likely point and after-
wards call in the stations not required .
9. When parties are compelled to move from their original
positions , much will depend upon the intelligence with which
they select new ones . No station will ever shift its position
without first informing all others in communication with it.
quoting the compass direction in which it proposes moving.
and if possible the point it intends occupying, and probable
time of " calling up. "
s. 207. 209
10. A careful pre-arrangement of stations is not required to

the same extent in sunny countries , where the flash of a
heliograph is more or less certain to attract attention.
11. When a chain of stations is being arranged , which will be
subsequently occupied by signallers who have not had an
opportunity of previously inspecting the ground, they should
be furnished with as much of the above information regard-
ing the stations as possible and will be much assisted by free-
hand sketches, however rough, of the appearance and position
of distant stations as viewed from their own.
12. It will frequently happen even in countries unfavourable
to the employment of the heliograph, that long ranges of
vision can be obtained on very clear and sunny days ; to take
advantage of these, subsidiary heliograph lines should be
arranged connecting the more distant stations direct, and
thus saving the time taken in transmitting messages through
intermediate stations .
207. OCCUPYING A CHAIN OF PERMANENT STATIONS .

When arranging for the occupation of permanent stations
the following points must be taken into consideration :·
i . The number of signallers required to work each
station ; no more than are necessary should be
detailed, but there should always be the full comple-
ment required under the most adverse circumstances
relating to maintaining communication .
ii. Whether reliefs are necessary and can be provided ;
this will depend upon whether the station is to be in
constant communication or whether it will only be
open (excepting for emergencies) during fixed hours
by day and night, and this again will depend upon
the probable amount of work which will have to be
dealt with. Although it may not be possible to man
a station with a full " relief," an extra signaller or
two will allow of the remainder resting in turn, and
when available should be detailed when the work is
heavy.
210 CHAP . IX. -ESTABLISHING AND OCCUPYING A LINE, &o.
iii. The supply of rations and water to the station .

iv . The transport necessary for equipment, &c.
v. The equipment necessary .
vi. Whether an escort is necessary ; this will depend upon
the distance to the nearest post or detachment ; in
some cases, such as at a large central station, it may
be considered that the strength of the party, even
though they be detached , is sufficient to justify their
being left without an escort .
208. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALLING OFFICERS IN

THE FIELD.
Officers in charge of signallers in the field , no matter
whether they be with a regiment or with the headquarters
of a brigade or division or on independent duty, should be
guided by the following instructions, which are by no means
exhaustive, but are drawn up for their assistance and to
indicate the lines upon which they should work.
i . Signalling officers should make and keep themselves
acquainted with the available strength and individual capabi-
lities of the signallers under their charge. They should also
know what equipment is available and its condition , and
must take steps to keep up the supply of consumable stores
so that communication never breaks down from want of the
same. When signallers are detached from their corps for
some particular service, it may be advisable for the officer in
charge of them to deal direct with the Army Ordance Depart-
ment, in which case all equipment would be accounted for in
a Field Equipment Ledger.
ii. The signallers should, as far as possible, be told off into
sections of three men ; it cannot be expected that all sig-
nallers will be of the same standard of efficiency, and they
should be grouped so as to comprise at any rate one first-rate
signaller or non-commissioned officer in each section who
would take charge of the same. Each section would
ordinarily furnish a terminal station , and two sections a
transmitting station. The available equipment would be
divided amongst the sections accordingly.
s. 208. 211
iii. From maps and personal observation, all signalling

officers should acquire a knowledge of the country in which
their work lies . This information, though perhaps not of
immediate use, may on some future occasion enable communi-
cation to be established in the minimum of time.
iv . They should endeavour to obtain as early information
as possible of the plan of operations, dispositions of troops ,
and any special requirements regarding signalling communi-
cation which the commander of their force may call upon
them to arrange for. But they must remember that the
above knowledge is as a rule not made general, and that it
must therefore be treated as strictly confidential, and any
action which would divulge the same must be guarded against
or screened . If it is necessary to place stations in isolated
positions, the officer in command should be informed , so that
suitable escort may be provided at his discretion .
v. Having arranged communication in accordance with the
above, they should use every opportunity of exploring the
ground in front, so that if called upon they may be prepared
to extend the chain of communication.
vi. All orders and instructions to subordinates should be in
writing and must be thorough and unmistakable. Pre-
arranged plans are often upset, and orders should provide
for possible contingencies ; in no case should isolated parties
be left without written orders , which , as well as instructing
them as to their immediate duties, must also inform them
what they should do on their completion . It should be
understood that orders are issued having certain circum-
stances in view, that these may be altered and that independ-
ent action consistent with such circumstances must not be
hampered by the existence of an order ; any such action
should, however, be reported on the first opportunity.
vii. They should ascertain and make known to signalling
stations the positions occupied by the various staffs and heads
of departments and any changes which may be made. They
should make known to the senior officer on the spot or the
nearest General Staff Officer the positions of signalling
stations and the extent to which communication has been
opened ; the above officers should likewise be kept informed
212 CHAPTER X.
of any alterations or extensions in the lines of signalling

communication. When instructions have been received to
open communication with any particular place or force and
this has been found impossible, the matter should be reported
so that the commander of the force may know that he must
send his messages, etc. , by some other method ; when break-
downs occur on any portion of the lines the fact should also
be notified. It must not be imagined that signalling is always
the most suitable method of transmitting information or
orders, and it is the duty of the signal officer to point out
when it would be necessary or more advantageous to employ
an alternate method .
All signallers in charge of stations should also be kept
informed regarding the extent of communication , etc. , and
they should be provided with a list of all stations and the
calls allotted to them.
viii. Signal officers must take steps to see that all stations
in their charge are provided with copies of the following
orders, which will be published from Army Headquarters :
Order giving ""the names of officers entitled to send
Priority messages. Any amendments to this
order should also be circulated .
Order prohibiting unauthorized persons (officers or other-
wise) loitering in the vicinity of stations.
Order requiring all messages to be either written or
dictated and to bear the signature of the addressor
or his deputy.
s. 209. 213
CHAPTER X.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES .
209 .
1. In all operations of war it is essential that uninterrupted
communication should be maintained between all portions
of the force (see Field Service Regulations, Part I , S. 8).
2. Irrespective of permanent overhead, underground and
submarine lines, the methods by which this is accomplished
are : -
Methods requiring a line to be laid ::-
i. Field Air Line.
ii. Field Cable.
Methods not requiring a line to be laid :-
iii. Wireless Telegraphy.
iv. Visual Signalling.
v. Balloons and kites (see Field Service Regulations , Part
I, S. 19).
vi . Despatch Riders and Orderlies (mounted, foot, motor
or cycle) (see Field Service Regulations , Part I,
S. 21).
vii. Postal Service (see Field Service Regulations, Part I,
S. 18, para. 1 and Part II, S. 86).
3. The method to be employed depends upon circumstances ,
but, if possible, no single method should be relied on , an
alternative method being provided in case of break-down .
4. In order to be able to decide rightly which method , or
methods, should be employed, the strong and weak points of
each must be borne in mind.
210. COMMUNICATION UNITS .
1. The establishments of the signal units allotted to the
expeditionary force of six divisions and one cavalry division,
together with notes as to the technical equipment provided
for them, are published in War Establishments.
214 CHAPTER X.
2. Where the exigencies of a campaign necessitate the

formation of field forces composed of arms not in the propor-
tions laid down in War Establishments it is to be noted
that :
i . Wireless telegraph equipment is required if inde-
pendent cavalry forms part of the force.
ii. The number of cable detachments required depends
upon the organization of the force in fighting
formation .
iii . The number of air-line sections required is dependent
on the number of lines on which the force is to
operate from its advanced base and the nature of
the telegraph communication existing in the
theatre of operations rather than on the strength
of the field force itself.
211. AIR LINE AND FIELD CABLE.

1. As a rule " Air Line " is used between the advanced base
and general headquarters of the forces in the field (Air Line
Companies) , and cable between general headquarters and
divisional headquarters (Cable Telegraph Companies) and for
internal communication in divisions (Divisional Telegraph
Companies) . With field air line and cable either telegraph
instruments or telephones can be used , and with the former
great speed with accuracy can be attained.
2. The limitations of field air line and cable are, that the
line takes some time to lay and to reel up after work, the
whole line is liable to damage, either malicious or accidental,
and it may take a considerable time to remove faults.
3. A lighter form of cable is employed with field telephones
for internal communication within artillery brigades and
batteries and within infantry brigades. The advantage of
this cable is that it can be laid from drums carried by hand
(in the case of battery equipment by mounted men). The
cable, however, being lighter, is more liable to damage, whilst
the telephone is a less reliable instrument than the field
telegraph.
s. 212. 215
212. WIRELESS TELEGRAPH .

1. Wireless telegraph is practically the only method that can
be employed for ensuring communication over long distances
of unprotected country, such as between headquarters of
cavalry brigades and the independent cavalry divisional head-
quarters and between this latter and general headquarters .
2. It has the disadvantages that it cannot be worked "on the
move ,," takes an appreciable time to bring into action, and
further, since signals sent are liable to be intercepted by the
enemy's wireless stations , it entails, in the case of important
messages, the use of cipher , taking time to encipher and
decipher.
213. VISUAL SIGNALLING.

The above methods are liable to break down , and there are
cases in which they are not suitable. Visual signalling and
orderlies are therefore necessary. The main advantages of
visual signalling over other methods are that : ----
i . In open and suitable country messages can be trans-
mitted great distances with little labour , few per-
sonnel, and small danger of break down.
ii. No transport is required . The detachment forming
each station is able to carry its own equipment.
iii. Communication between moving troops can be con-
stantly maintained by means of successive central
stations, and good previous organization and orders .
iv . The communication cannot be cut by the enemy or
hostile inhabitants. On the other hand signals are
liable to be read by the enemy and visual methods
are useless in close wooded country, or under
unfavourable atmospheric conditions .
214. ORDERLIES (MOUNTED, Foor, MOTOR, OR CYCLE) .
1. In thick weather, in the absence of " Wireless " and
when telegraph and telephone lines have not been laid,
orderlies are the only method of communication .
2. In most European countries, when the roads are good.
cyclist orderlies will be found the best.
216 CHAPTER X.
3. Under rifle fire, foot orderlies will generally be found to

be the only method of communication, possible.
4. The chief defect of this method is, that the sender of a
message, generally has no means of knowing whether his
message has been delivered , unless the orderly returns, which
may involve much uncertainty and delay (see also Field
Service Regulations , Part I, S. 20) .
215. GENERAL REMARKS .

Generally in communication services , the following axioms
should be borne in mind :-
:·
i . Messages should be curtailed as far as possible, con-
sistent with clearness (see also Field Service Regu-
lations, Part I, S. 9).
ii . A message handed in must be got to its destination
somehow. If one method fails another must be
tried .
iii. Telegraph and telephone lines should not be laid when
the object can be obtained equally well by signalling
or orderlies, but
iv. When telegraph or telephone lines have been laid, the
reverse is the case and messages should be sent by
them in preference to by signalling or orderly.
It is a mistake to employ visual methods for short dis-
tances , except over dangerous zones of fire. A
bicycle orderly can take a message a mile in
five minutes , whatever its length, whereas only a
message of about 25 words could be signalled and
delivered in that time.
v. All signalling stations should be thoroughly acquainted
with the positions and calls of all other signalling
stations with which there is any likelihood of their
having to be in communication and they should at
all times keep a constant lookout, and be prepared
for communication in any direction.
vi. As far as possible, the number of stations rather than
the number of men in a station , should be reduced ,
s. 215. 217
though occasions may arise when the work of a

station has to be temporarily carried out by one
man.
vii . Signallers must remember that the sole object of their
existence is to keep the commander in touch with
the various parts of his force and to enable his plans
to be promptly and smoothly executed . All regula-
tions are, therefore, made only for their guidance
and not as a support for refusing to take important
messages owing to some technical irregularity.
viii . Lamp signalling may-owing to the close proximity of
the enemy- be inadvisable, if there be doubt, the
wishes of the commander of the force should be
ascertained ; but it is possible that this difficulty
may be overcome by the use of DD, DD messages
from front to rear (vide page 127 ).
ix. Signalling stations should be moved as seldom as
possible ; this is a point where a complete previous
understanding of the plans of the commander and
good orders to the signallers may save much trouble.
x. Signallers should not be sent away from their stations
on orderly duty for the delivery of messages . Suffi-
cient orderlies for the work should be provided by
the nearest troops .
218 CHAP. XI.-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
PART III.
CHAPTER XI.
216. COURSE OF INSTRUCTION.

1. Instructors are not to consider themselves bound to
adhere strictly to the following system in the training of their
signallers ; they alone will be the best judges of the capabili-
ties of their men, and will use their own discretion and
initiative in any method they may adopt. The following
instructions, which have been found to give good results , are
offered only as a guide. The main object to be kept in view
by them is the training of their men to the highest state of
efficiency in all the duties required of them in the field .
Instruction in signalling affords great scope for exercising
the ingenuity of both officers and non-commissioned officers in
devising methods of bringing home to those under instruction
all details of the subject.
2. Regimental classes will be formed at such times as may
be convenient, and so as to interfere as little as possible with
other branches of training , but when once a class has com-
menced it must be continued without interruption and the
men composing it struck off all duties and parades. If at
any time during a course an instructor is of opinion that a
man, from any cause whatsoever, is not likely to make an
efficient and reliable signaller, he should return him to duty
forthwith. It is impossible to lay down exactly the duration
of the class , but it will be found that an average of from
three to four months is required to enable a novice to reach
the required standard of efficiency qualifying a man to be
s. 216. 219
classified as a trained signaller. It should be remembered

that this standard is of necessity a low one, and that a man,
although capable of reading and sending at the rate laid
down therein, cannot be looked upon as an expert. The
more practical experience a man has and the higher his rate
of proficiency in sending and reading the more readily will he
cope with the difficulties inseparable from signalling on active
service . For this reason, it is desirable to obtain , when
possible, men who have a considerable period to serve with
the Colours ; this should lead to greater efficiency and at the
same time reduce the number of men whom it is necessary
to train in order to keep the required number of signallers
complete.
3. The course will consist in : -
i . Learning the alphabets , numerals , and special signals .
ii. Acquiring proficiency in reading from and sending on
the various instruments .
iii. The use, construction , and care of the various instru-
ments .
iv. The detailed duties of station work and the method of
dealing with messages .
v. Establishment of various kinds of stations in the field.
The above order should be followed generally, but the
interest of the men should be maintained by varying the
subjects, and bad weather should be made use of for lectures
and in-door instruction in the more advanced portion of the
work.
4. It is only by constant practice in long distance signalling ,
wherein is entailed map reading, study of the country and
correct location of stations , that the best results can be looked
for on active service ; at the same time it must be remem-
bered that it is useless to send men out for station work
unless they are proficient readers and senders and can make
the most of their instruments . This is, therefore , the first
consideration , and with this object the class should be fre-
quently tested and the results showing the order of merit
exhibited for their information , thus encouraging competi-
tion.
220 CHAP . XI.-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
5. On the conclusion of the course, the results showing the

rates at which each man can send and read proficiently ,
should be published in regimental orders , but on no account
is a man to be classified as a trained signaller unless he has
reached the standard of efficiency herein laid down, which is
to be considered as a minimum.
6. When first assembled for instruction, the men must be
examined by dictation as to their capabilities of writing well
and quickly and spelling correctly, and those men rejected
who are unable to meet the necessary requirements . It will
be found convenient to have the class composed of an even
number of men so that they may work in pairs.
7. In learning the Morse alphabet it will be sufficient on the
first day to take four to eight letters ; the simplest letters
should be taken first, next their opposites (e.g. , A, and
N,- ) and the remaining letters should be gradually built
up until the whole alphabet has been included . Men, how-
ever, must not be hurried on to fresh letters before they
have grasped those already explained to them.
An assistant instructor, having previously named the
letter, will send it on the dummy key at or near the standard
rate, so as to accustom the men to grasp the letter in its
entirety and not piece it together as each element is heard ;
when several letters have been thus taught, he should send
them indiscriminately mixed , and each man will call out in
rotation the letter immediately it is sent.
The letters T, A, B, M, S, P. and V will be called toc, ack ,
beer, emma, esses, pip, and vic respectively, so as to
phonetically distinguish them from similarly sounding letters ,
and to ensure uniformity no other names will be given them
or to any of the other letters of the alphabet .
During a portion of this practice the letters will be written
down by each man in block capitals , and care must be taken
that such letters as D and O, V and U, are formed so as to
be easily distinguished .
8. The class will be drilled daily in Morse and Semaphore ; on
no account should " Flag Drill " be hurried , and men must not
be expected to make a group of letters before they can make
them singly with ease and without hesitation , or even before
s. 216. 221
they have learnt to adopt at once the correct positions in

forming the letters by numbers . A good style and idea of
""
time acquired from the first at Flag Drill " will save
trouble afterwards and materially shorten the time taken to
reach the standard of efficiency. On the first day it will be
found sufficient to take the letters by numbers, already learnt
on the dummy key ; when the alphabet is thoroughly known
the method of sending and checking numerals will be taught ,
and next groups of figures, groups of letters and words . The
special signals will be introduced gradually so that the class
may understand the practical use of them ; if they are all
taught in one lesson and without practical illustrations of the
method of employing them the time so occupied may be
looked upon as lost. The attendance at drill should not be
too long.
9. When the men have learnt to recognize a few letters sent
on the dummy key and also how to make them at flag drill ,
they should be told off into pairs to read short mixed groups
of the same letters sent by the assistant instructor on the
flag, and as a preface to this each letter may be sent twice ,
a trained signaller with the squad calling out the letter the
first time and the class calling it out the second time it is
sent. When reading in pairs, each man will take it in turn
to read and write down. It is important to impress upon the
class at this stage that each man must attend only to his own
work, i.e., that the reader concentrates his attention on what
is being sent and that the writer devotes himself to putting
down correctly each letter as it is called out to him ; attention
to such matters as these is the foundation of good discipline and
co-operation at station work. The letters will be written
in block capitals in fours (see Section 218 (2 ) ) ; should the
reader fail to recognize a letter directly it is sent to him he
will not try to recollect it but will say " miss ." his writer
marking the omission with a dot.
Should the weather be favourable a similar practice may be
carried out with the heliograph, but when first commencing,
the groups should not consist of more than thirty letters
without a pause .
1842 P
222 CHAP. XI.-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
10. Practice at lamp reading should be undertaken from the

first day of the course, and the time devoted to this should
certainly equal and preferably exceed that devoted to flag
reading. Lamp reading may be carried out by day (par-
ticularly if the weather be dull) by placing a lamp in a
darkened room or shed and flashing through a window or
door . But this must not be taken as sufficient practice, and
the lamp must also be read under its normal conditions by
night .
11. As proficiency is gained at flag drill the time devoted to
it may be lessened and instruction given in sending on the
dummy key and lamp.
12. After a fortnight or three weeks the class will be formed
into pairs in two lines, each pair being separated from that
on its right and left by a distance of 8 to 10 yards, an
assistant instructor taking charge of each line ; each pair
will be provided with group cards and each man should send
and read a group , the small flag being employed . This prac-
tice should also be carried out with lamps by night.
13. When the class can read groups of 78 letters (i.e. , the
letters of the alphabet taken three times over) fairly
accurately at 6 words per minute, reading practice should
consist partly of groups and partly of paragraphs.
14. Instruction in sending on the heliograph should not be
attempted until proficiency on the flag and dummy key has
been obtained and the use of most of the special signs
thoroughly understood , so that each man can devote his
attention to the manipulation of the instrument and keeping
his light. When giving instruction in setting up, aligning,
and packing up the heliograph the instructions for the same
are to be carefully and minutely followed, otherwise the
instrument will probably be badly damaged.
15. When the class are proficient at reading and sending both
groups and paragraphs and the message form has been
explained to them, they should be formed into terminal
stations and should be required to send short messages of ten
to fifteen words. These may be gradually lengthened and
s. 216. 223
made more difficult. The position they occupy and the duties
they are to perform at station work must be explained to
them practically, and the greatest care must be taken that
each man confines his attention to whatever may be his duty
for the time being ; after each message the men at a station
should change round so that they may become proficient in
all the various duties.
When the work between terminals can be correctly and
expeditiously carried out and the method of checking and
correcting messages is mastered, transmitting stations will
be introduced and instruction given in the duties thereat ;
there is no surer sign of good training than that a message
passes through a transmitting station correctly, quickly , and
quietly.
The distances between the stations should at first be short,
but should be gradually increased so that it will be necessary
to use the telescope ; practice in the use of the same both
by day and night should be frequent not only at station work
but when reading messages sent by an assistant instructor .
16. When every man is thoroughly acquainted with every
detail of his work, the class together with the trained sig-
nallers will be broken up into parties fully equipped and sent
out to work at long distances, the signallers being taught to
apply practically the instruction they have received by carry-
ing out the following exercises : —
i. Occupying stations in the field previously determined
upon from the map.
ii . Connecting by day and night the different portions of
an imaginary line of outposts .
iii. Practice at fixed stations in communicating with
signal parties supposed to be attached to patrols ,
&c., moving in prearranged directions and sending
back information from time to time.
iv. Bridging a supposed break in a telegraph wire (two or
even three stations at either end may be estab-
lished).
224 CHAP . XI.- COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
v. Lateral communication between two or more imaginary
columns on the line of march. This can only be
carried out under favourable circumstances , and if
possible the signallers should be mounted on horses ,
bicycles, &c.
vi. Taking up a line of stations in unknown country with-
out the aid of maps.
vii. Working at a central station and transmitting
messages through it.
viii. Communication during tactical exercises carried out
by the squadron, company, &c. , to which the sig-
nallers belong .
17. Instructors should see that at the commencement of the
class matters are made easy for the learner, but as he grows
proficient difficulties should be introduced so that he may
gain experience in overcoming them. At first a considerable
pause should be made by the assistant instructor between
each letter to enable the men to think of it ; this will be
gradually decreased as they progress , but care must be taken
not to run the letters together , whatever the rate of sending
may be. Assistant instructors must not be allowed to get
into irregular ways in sending, as the example set by them
will be copied by the learner. At first the distance between
the sender and the readers should be comparatively short,
but it must be gradually increased to the greatest extent
possible ; when testing a class in reading, the distance (except
in very unfavourable weather) should be at least 500 yards
in the case of the small flag, semaphore, and lamp ; with the
heliograph the distance should be as great as practicable.
In reading test messages the use of binoculars and telescopes
is not necessary and will not be permitted . It is of the
utmost importance that all groups or messages sent at read-
ing practice should be written down and checked on the con-
clusion of the practice. It is only by constant effort on the
part of the learner whilst at practice that he can hope to
improve his powers of reading , and beginners should not be
discouraged by the apparent hopelessness of their first
attempts.
s. 217. 225
18. As regards sending, any attempt at gaining speed at the

expense of style should be checked , and care must be taken
from the commencement that in forming the letters H , B,
&c., the right number of dots are sent. No irregular
methods of sending letters with a view of more readily dis-
tinguishing them must be permitted , otherwise the
uniformity of system which is the mainstay of intercommuni-
cation between the signallers of all units will be destroyed .
217 . MESSAGES .
The messages used for the instruction of a class and to test

the proficiency in reading and sending of individual signallers
are either :-
Test groups .
Paragraph messages .
Classification messages .
218. TEST GROUPS .
1. These are arranged as shown in the following example ,

and are composed by taking each letter of the alphabet three
times over and placing them in any order, thus making 78
letters in all . It has been found that the average length of
English words is practically equivalent to five letters, but as
in a test group each letter occurs the same number of times ,
it may be taken to be equivalent to 20 ordinary words of the
English language, in which the shorter letters (according to
the Morse signs) occur more frequently than the longer ones.
Hence the time allowed for a test group at any particular
rate may be arrived at by dividing 20 by the rate number .
thus a test group at 10 words per minute or rate 10 should
take 2 mins ., or one at 6 words per minute will take 3 mins.
20 secs .
226 CHAP. XI.-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION.
2. Example of Test Group and manner of writing down : -

G D KA
F I U Q
J MY L
I PN
BU Q
KAJ
MUQ G
TR X V
E CR
J G E
NFH
PTN
Y BR B
DOK W
W ZIF
LCOZ
TSX V
XHS D
PH S Z
LO
219. PARAGRAPH MESSAGES .

1. These consist of any ordinary sentences or paragraphs and
are of varying lengths according to requirements . In calculat
ing the time in which to send them, for any given rate, the
average of five letters to one word will be reckoned upon, and
the number of words (thus calculated) divided by the rate.
Thus supposing it is required to send a message containing
150 letters at eight words per minute or rate 8 the time
taken should be 150 or 3 mins. 45 secs. On the other hand ,
5×8
supposing it is desired that a class should read for 5 mins.
continuously at rate 6 or six words per minute, the message
must contain 5 × 6 × 5 = 150 letters .
2. Example of Paragraph Message containing 150 letters : —
These morbid hallucinations are much more often durable and
s. 220. 227
much more often repeated, moreover we commend this point

to those who regard verdical hallucinations as merely wrong.
3. Paragraph messages will be signalled exactly as they
are written. Marks of punctuation , etc. , will not be sent .
220. CLASSIFICATION MESSAGES .
Messages used for testing individuals for classification are
made out on A.F. C 2121 .
An example of a Morse " Classification Message ""
equivalent to 200 letters, or 40 words-is given on page 228.
The time allowed for it, at 8 words per minute, is 5 minutes .
The text after " AAA " to second " break, " both exclusive ,
is composed of 3 alphabets , arranged in groups of different
lengths, representing words of an unintelligible foreign
language. This consists of 78 letters, but as the longer
letters occur more often than in ordinary English, this is
equivalent to 100 letters . (See Section 218.) The remainder
consists of ordinary English, including a fictitious number of
words, a Sender's number, Date, in reply to number, and
AAA, amounting together to 100 letters, as follows :-
XM DPM HL eightysix CMDG FI 1/2 FF BN MI ASH
(bracket) or forward (bracket) (break) X FI 7 FF
fourth Z FI 9 FF AAA (break) L T (Hyphen) COL
WYNNE HALE FI 3.15 FF PM.
A 'Half-message is exactly similar, and consists of 50
letters, and 1 alphabets.
When preparing messages for Semaphore tests, the above
signals, will, together, amount to 122 letters, instead of 100,
and consideration must be given to the difference in sending
by Semaphore (e.g. Numerical sign counts as one letter, FI
as two letters).
For the sake of convenience the following miscellaneous
signals either by Morse or Semaphore- will count as
shown : -
Full stop, break signal, hyphen , oblique stroke, and
horizontal bar, as 2 letters each.
Inverted commas, underline, and parentheses or brackets,
as 4 letters each .
)(Example
220.
Section C121
2Form
Army
A
F
"
. orm AND
MESSAGES SIGNALS . No.
of
Message
Prefix Words
. .Charge
228
Code
DP
.XM
m This
message
on
is Recd
.at .
m
86 ;a/cof
Sent
. Service
. Date
Origin
of
Office
Service
and At .
.m From
Instructions
. HL Tc- of
S( ignature
By .")FrankingBy
Officer
CMDG 1/2
To BN M I
ASH )(or
forward
*Sender's
Number Month
of
Day Number
In
to
reply
7
X Fourth 9
Z AAA
XVHGE LQDIKO RSOQC FJLTZ YFJM
TBHP VEW CMRNDA OUXY ZTQAI
KSFMPB UWCIA VENBGH XWRJ LNYDGK
PSUZ
C LT
.- OL
.From WYNNE
Place HALE
CHAP. XI.-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
Time 3.15 p.m.

above
The
may
forwarded
be
now
corrected
.as
)
(Z
Signatur
Addresso
of
person
or er
Censor
. authoriz
telegrap
to
his
name
.in ed
h
*his
line
should
erased
be
not
required
T.if
8. 221 . 229
221 . CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALLERS , REGULAR FORCES .

(1) Tests.-
Before being classified for proficiency pay and entitled to
wear a badge, signallers must pass the following tests : —
(In India this standard is to be aimed at according to the
equipment of the unit, and, in British Corps , must be
obtained to qualify for proficiency pay and badge.)
(i) Read a "" message "" as defined below sent on the
helio and dummy key or buzzer , at 8 words a
minute, i.e., in 5 minutes.
(For signallers of Indian units the requirement is 5 words
a minute, i.e. , in66 8 minutes"" .)
(ii) Read a message sent by semaphore at 10 words
per minute, i.e., in 4 minutes, the readers to be
not less than 500 yards from the sender.
(For signallers of Indian units the requirement is just
under 6 words a minute, i.e., in 7 minutes.)
(iii) Read a " half message " ' sent on the small flag (morse)
and lamp, at 8 words per minute, i.e. , in 2
minutes , using the service telescope, the sender
to be such a distance from the reader that the
messages cannot be read with the naked eye .
(Until October 1st, 1912 , this rate may be reduced
to 6 words per minute, viz. , the messages may
take three and a third minutes).
(For signallers of Indian units the requirement is 4 words
a minute, i.e. , in 5 minutes . )
(iv) Send one " half message "" on the large flag at 6 words
per minute, i.e. , in three and a third minutes .
(In India the large flag is so little used that a general
proficiency in its use alone is required .)
(v) Send 66 one message on the small flag (morse) ,
heliograph , lamp and dummy key or buzzer , at
8 words per minute , i.e. , in 5 minutes .
(vi) Send 66 one message by semaphore at 10 words per
minute, i.e., in 4 minutes.
230 CHAP. XI .-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION.
NOTES ON READING AND SENDING TESTS (i.e. , TESTS (1) TO (VI . )

(a) In all reading tests, an assistant instructor of another
unit should send the messages, and the officer conducting the
classification will time them. Each man will be given two
messages to read, and the result of the better of the two will
be counted for his classification . Both these messages will
be read on the same day.
(b) In all the above tests, both sending and reading, the
messages will be made out on Army Form C 2121 , as laid
down in Sec. 220.
The signal VE will be sent, but will not be counted or
written down.
The cipher sign (CC) will not be sent, and the nature of the
message should be explained to the men before they begin.
It will facilitate checking afterwards, if the writers be
ordered to write down the whole of the text in block letters .
(c) The message sent should be read if possible by assistant
instructors of other units, but, if not, they may be read by
selected signallers of other units.
(d) Each signaller will, in the sending tests, be allowed to
send one message only on each instrument.
(e) In all the above tests the readers, with their writers or
callers (as the case may be) will be lined up in pairs at suffi-
cient interval to prevent their being overheard by one
another.
The writer down will have his back to the sender . The
sender will be at least 500 yards from the reader in all short
distance tests.
(f) Sky backgrounds should be avoided as tending to train
signallers to wrong methods.
(g) In checking messages, each letter or figure omitted ,
added, misread, or mis-sent (as the case may be) and each
letter or figure altered on the form, will count as one mistake .
(h) Signallers should not be recommended for classification
until the officer in charge considers them fit to pass. In order
to ascertain this, signalling officers should hold preliminary
tests of their own . Signallers who fail cannot be allowed
another opportunity during that signalling year. I
s. 221 . 231
(i) The officer who conducts the classification is responsible

for the preparation and checking of all the messages.
(5) Words will not be answered in either sending or reading
tests.
(k) In heliograph sending tests , the reader will " call for
light," whenever necessary.
(vii) Possess a thorough knowledge of map reading, that is
to say : -
(1) Know all the conventional signs.
(2) Be able to set a map with, and without, a compass.
(3) Be able to identify places both on the map and
on the ground.
(4) Be capable of measuring distances on a map.
(5) Be able to recognize the shape of the ground from
the map, i.e., know where the high ground is.
(6) Understand, and use the prismatic compass for the
purpose of taking bearings .
(7) Be able to take a bearing off a map .
NOTE . Signallers of R.G.A. employed in coast defences will be
required to read and send mechanical semaphore as laid
down for semaphore tests (ii) and (vi) and to satisfy the
officer conducting the classification that they are com-
petent to exchange signals by the R.G.A. special signalling
code. This test can be substituted for map reading of
which these signallers need only have an elementary
knowledge .
(viii) Possess a thorough knowledge of the mechanism of all
signalling instruments , including telephones and
limelight apparatus, in the case of units which are
equipped with them, and the methods of effecting
minor repairs to the same.
(ix) Be capable of aligning heliographs by every method
and of focussing telescopes and picking up distant
objects with rapidity and accuracy.
(x) Be thoroughly conversant with all the details of count-
ing, sending, transmitting and receiving messages,
and of all practical work which may be required of
them in the field .
232 CHAP. XI.- COURSE OF INSTRUCTION.
(2) Standard.-
(i) Signallers will be classified as 1st class signaller , 2nd
class signaller or " failed ."
A first class signaller must read and send all the tests (i) to
(vi) with an accuracy of 98 per cent . in each case.
(ii) A second class signaller must do this with an accuracy
of 95 per cent. in each case.
(iii) Any man failing to be a second class signaller will be
classified as " failed ."
(iv) No man will be classified as 1st class unless he shows
good knowledge of all the subjects and tests (vii)
to (x) and no man as 2nd class unless he shows a
fair knowledge.
(v) Signallers may be reduced from 1st class to 2nd class
or from 2nd class to " failed , " by the officer, who
conducts the classification, if he does not consider
them fit in every way for the higher classification .
But a man's classification cannot be raised on
account of good work under paragraphs (vii) to (x) .
3. Officers to Conduct the Classification.-
The following officers will conduct the classification
practices :--
(i) In a division the A.D. of A.S. * assisted by brigade
signalling officers) .
(ii) In a cavalry regiment, the brigade signalling officer ,
or other officer detailed by the general officer com-
manding-in-chief.
(iii) In coast defences, an officer appointed by the G.O.C.
(iv) In all cases not provided for a qualified officer of
another unit to be appointed by the G.O.C. or O.C.
concerned.
In (i) and (ii) the officers mentioned will also classify the
signallers employed with the headquarters of their divisions
and brigades .
If desired, an officer of the School of Signalling will attend
(see Section 226).
* In divisions to which an A.D. of A.S. has not been appointed an
officer will be selected by the G.O.C. to carry out the classification.
s. 221 . 233
(4) Signalling Year.

(i) For the training of signallers the year will be taken
to last from October 1st to September 30th.
(ii) The usual procedure in the United Kingdom will be
to commence the training of new signallers soon
after manœuvres . It will not be possible , as a
rule , for newly-trained men to be sufficiently
advanced in their training to be capable of classi-
fication in the classification tests during the first
six months of their training, but, should any man
have reached the necessary standards , there is no
objection to their undergoing the classification
tests.
(iii) The time in the United Kingdom between October
1st and February 28th should be devoted, when the
men are not on furlough, to getting them
thoroughly efficient in the ten subjects laid down
for classification , and in the classification tests.
(iv) The time between March 1st and September 30th in
the United Kingdom should be devoted to train- ""
ing them to work with troops (or in " “ schemes
where the troops are imaginary) and to become
thoroughly efficient in the duties of a signaller in
the field, in accordance with tactical requirements .
In the cases of new signallers it will probably be
necessary to keep them at elementary work for the
greater part of the summer.
(v) Abroad these dates must be altered to suit local
training arrangements .
(vi) The classification practices will thus be finished by
February 28th (by November 30th in India) . The
inspection (see Section 222) should be finished by
September 30th and copies of the return (on Army
Form B 225) should reach the Commandant , School
of Signalling, by October 31st.
234 CHAP. XI.- COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
Army Form B 225.
ANNUAL RETURN OF SIGNALLERS.
Name of Unit.
Station
Names of Officers and Non-commissioned Officers holding certificates.
Name. Where Date. How employed .

Rank. obtained.
Number of efficient Signallers :-

:-
First Class
Second Class
Total
Signallers trained since last inspection.
Casualties :-
To Reserve
Drafts to other units
Other causes ...
s. 221. 235
Remarks by Officer Commanding Unit on Classification Practices carried

out, and General Training.
Remarks by Inspecting Officers on work in Collective Tests, and

General Training.
Vide King's Regulations, paragraphs 115 to 118 inclusive.
Remarks by General Officer Commanding Division.
Remarks by General Officer Commanding-in-Chief.

236 CHAP. XI .-COURSE OF INSTRUCTION .
222. INSPECTION OF SIGNALLERS. REGULAR FORCES .
1. The signallers of all units will be inspected annually
under the orders of the General Officer Commanding-in-Chief
or General Officer Commanding.
2. These inspections will be carried out after the classifica-
tion of signallers by the regimental authorities has been
decided, but must be completed before the 30th September in
each year .
223.
1. Instructors , assistant instructors and signallers will be
examined in the annual inspection in a collective test based
on a tactical scheme or schemes with a view to judging the
collective capabilities of the signallers of the unit.
2. The test should be undertaken on as realistic lines as
possible and should comprise a whole day's or, if necessary,
two days' work, that will necessitate the use by day of all
instruments held on charge ; a portion of the test should be
carried out at night and the limelight apparatus made use of
by those units in possession of it.
3. Inspecting officers should take steps to ensure that the
work is evenly distributed among the men composing each
station.
4. Schemes should be drawn up so as to test the signallers of
various arms in work which might legitimately be allotted to
them on service, and the instructor, or in his absence the
assistant instructor, will issue the necessary instructions to
the signallers on the orders given for establishing communi-
cation in connection with the scheme .
5. The work should be carried out without any pre-arrange-
ment or rehearsal and if possible over unknown ground , in
order to verify the practical abilities and common sense of
the men working collectively under conditions approximating
to those on active service .
6. The signallers of field troops, field companies and balloon
companies, Royal Engineers, will be inspected in conjunction
with units belonging to brigades, divisions, or commands, to
which they may be attached.
s. 224. 237
7. The signallers of as many coast defence companies, Royal

Garrison Artillery, as can conveniently co-operate will be
inspected collectively ; at single company stations, the sig-
nallers should be inspected in conjunction with the nearest
Infantry unit available .
224. IRISH HORSE AND TERRITORIAL FORCES .
The signallers of the Irish Horse and Territorial Forces will
be classified and inspected on similar lines to those laid down
for regulars in Section 221 and 223, with the following excep-
tions with regard to their classification : -
(1) The time limits will be :--
(i) Large flag 4 minutes.
(ii) Helio, small flag , lamp , and dummy key or buzzer ,
7 minutes.
(iii) Semaphore, 5 minutes .
(iv) In the reading tests the sender will be a fully qualified
N.C.O. , who holds a certificate from a school of
signalling. It is desirable that the same N.C.O.
should send all the tests for one unit. The read-
ing of the small flag and lamp will not be through
the telescope and the messages, &c. , will be as laid
down for helio and dummy key. (Section 221 (i) ) .
In sending tests , the readers may belong to the
same unit as the senders, if men of other units
cannot be obtained.
(2) They need only be tested with the instruments issued to
their units, but in the event of a unit possessing private
equipment, they may be tested with it, the fact being recorded
on Army Form B 225.
(3) The officers who conduct classification practices will be
qualified regular officers, other than Territorial adjutants,
appointed by the general officer commanding-in-chief each
command annually for this purpose.
(4) The classification practices may take place up to July
15th (but not later). No man may take part in the inspection
who has not been classified as a 1st or 2nd class signaller
during that signalling year.
1842
238 CHAP. XII .- SCHOOL OF SIGNALLING , &c .
225. RETURNS.
1. A copy of the annual return-Army Form B 225- when
it has been returned to the corps completed with the remarks
of the General Officer Commanding, or Commanding-in-
Chief, entered thereon will be submitted by each unit to the
Commandant, School of Signalling, Aldershot, in order that
the necessary records may be available for the compilation of
the yearly report. These copies should reach the School of
Signalling, Aldershot, before 31st October.
2. In the case of Royal Artillery of the Regular
Forces a copy of Army Form B 225 completed
as regards pages 1 and 2 by the O.C. the Battery
and O.C. the Brigade , will be forwarded for each battery or
company . The 3rd and 4th pages will be completed , as
regards the collective test on the Army Form B 225 , of the
senior battery of the brigade.
226.
The Commandant, School of Signalling, Aldershot, or one
of the instructors, will, whenever it may be desired, visit any
station in the United Kingdom to afford such assistance
with advice in connection with training or classification as
may be required .
227. PRIZES .
The Commandant, School of Signalling , Aldershot , is alone
empowered to authorise the issue of prizes and badges in
accordance with the Pay Warrant, Article 1051 .
CHAPTER XII.
SCHOOL OF SIGNALLING AND GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS .
228. THE ARMY SCHOOL OF SIGNALLING.
Object.
1. The school of signalling is for all matters connected with
training under the direct control of the Director of Military
Training, General Staff, War Office , and has been established
s. 229. 239
for the special training of officers and non-commissioned

officers, in order that they may thoroughly qualify themselves
for the positions of instructors and assistant instructors ,
respectively, and also that a uniform system of training may
prevail throughout the army.
2. The system laid down and taught at the School of
Signalling, Aldershot, is to be adhered to throughout the
army .
Courses of Instruction
1. The dates of assembly of courses for officers and non-
commissioned officers of the regular and auxiliary forces , will
be notified annually in Army Orders.
2. Applications to attend will be submitted in accordance
with the King's Regulations.
3. Special Reserve, Irish Horse, Territorial Forces and
Channel Islands Militia .-Officers of Special Reserve and
officers and non-commissioned officers, Irish Horse, Territorial
Forces and Channel Islands Militia, will attend under the
instructions contained in the regulations dealing with those
branches of the service.
4. Colonial Forces.-Officers and members of Colonial
Military and Police Forces may attend under the conditions
set forth in the King's Regulations .
229. CERTIFICATES .
1. Regular Forces : -There are two classes of certificates
for officers and one for non-commissioned officers of the
regular forces . The certificates for the former are termed
" Special Certificate of Signalling " and the " Instructor's
Certificate of Signalling .'
The certificate for non-commissioned officers is termed the
"Assistant Instructor's Certificate of Signalling."
2. Irish Horse , Territorial Forces and Channel Islands
Militia : -On passing a successful examination on the con-
clusion of a course at a School of Signalling , officers and non-
commissioned officers of the Irish Horse , Territorial Forces
and Channel Islands Militia will be awarded certificates
qualifying them respectively for the appointment of
Instructor and Assistant-Instructor to their units .
EFFICIENCY
OF
STANDARD
.230.
REQUIRED 240
To
“Snstructor's
the
Iobtain
"A,a
Instructor's
pecial
ssistant
nd
Certificates
Signalling
of
.
Reading
Sending
and
at
aminute
.words
Written
oral
and
Percentageexamina
of - Remarks
.
tions
p
, er-
.
accuracy centage
marks
.of
CHAP. XII.
or Buzzer.
Small Flag.*
Heliograph.
Lamp.*
Dummy Key
Semaphore.
.
Forces
Regular
SOfficers
"., ..pecial 8 8 810 98.00 80 and
non
-c(i)Officers
om-
be
will
officers
missioned
00
00
10
68
the
required
satisfy
to
of
School
Commandant
,Instructor's
"Officers 8 8 8 8 10 95.00 66 their
to
as
Signalling
66
capability
ac-
sending
of
curately
,
flag
large
the
on
Officers
cNon
,- ommissioned
8 8 810 98.00 66 that
and
are
they
likely
AInstructor's
""ssistant efficient
make
in-
to
99
.
structors
, erritorial
Horse
TIrish OOs)(iifficers
N.C.
.oand f
and
Channel
Forces Irish
THorse
,the erritor-
.
Militia
Islands Forces
ial
Channel
and
SCHOOL OF SIGNALLING, &c.
Islands
Militia
will
only
Officers 180 95.00 66 required
be
pass
to
on
such
instruments
as
are
units
.
of
their
charge
on
Officers
- ommissioned
cNon 10 95.00 66
without
telescope
with
both
read
to
have
R.and
*egulars
s. 231 . 241
231. ADJUTANTS OF SPECIAL RESERVE. SEMAPHORE

QUALIFICATION .
1. The following qualifications are necessary for candidates
for the appointment as Adjutant of Special Reserve :-
i . To send one and read two service messages (Moving
Station) of 200 letters at the rate of ten words per
minute . Degree of accuracy 95 per cent . in both
cases .
ii. To be conversant with Semaphore Drill.
2. The results of the reading and sending to be written
down by the officer conducting the examination, who will
be assisted by a signaller .
3. Officers will be examined locally under arrangements to
be made by the General Officer Commanding.
4. The examination will be carried out by a qualified sig-
nalling officer who will himself prepare the necessary papers .
5. On the conclusion of the examination , all messages and
papers will be sent to the Commandant, School of Signalling,
Aldershot, who will notify the result to the General Officer
Commanding .
232. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS .
1. Signallers will be kept in practice throughout the year,
but this practice will not interfere with the Annual Course of
training, and should be carried out in conjunction with field
exercises.
2. When two or more units are quartered at the same
station, combined practice extending over a large area of
country will be held under the superintendence of a selected
instructor.
3. Classes of instruction will be formed by each unit during
the non-training season . Men under instruction may be
relieved from all duties which interfere with the course .
4. Instructors and Assistant Instructors will be struck off
duties when instructing a class .
5. The Assistant Instructor and all qualified signallers of a
unit will wear the badges authorized by the Clothing
Regulations.
242 CHAP . XIII .-TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c .
CHAPTER XIII.
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF

TELEPHONES IN THE FIELD .
TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS AND CIRCUITS .
233. CIRCUITS .
For a current of electricity to be generated by a battery ,
such as forms part of a field telephone, it is necessary that
the two ends, or poles, of the battery should be connected by
a continuous conductor of electricity. The internal connec-
tions of the telephones are so arranged that the current
passing through this conductor will reproduce the vibration
of the air set up by the voice , or will produce a buzzing call
as required . The telephones may be connected together
either by two insulated wires , or by one insulated wire and
the earth ; the latter method alone is used in the field , and
will alone be considered here . The complete apparatus,
telephones , cable, and earth-connections , is called a circuit,
and any break in the circuit renders the apparatus useless
until it is repaired .
234. CABLES .
The method of laying cables is treated separately from the
point of view of drill. The essentials from an electrical point
of view are : -
i . The metal conductor must be continuous, or the cur-
rent will not flow. Joints must be pinched up tight
with pliers.
s. 235. 243
ii. The insulation must be good ; at every place where

the bare wire touches a non-insulator, such as a tree,
or wet grass , or soil, a certain amount of current
leaks away and is wasted .
iii. Cables must not be laid nearer together than five
yards for any distance ; and when they have to cross
each other they should be separated as far as
possible, otherwise currents are induced from one to
the other, which disturb the clearness of the signals .
235. EARTHS .
1. One terminal of each telephone is connected by means
of a short length of wire to an earth-pin. The pin should
be placed in damp earth, or water poured round it. The
pin, or a knife, to the blade of which a wire is tightly bound,
may be stuck into a living tree or bush, the sap of which
causes it to form a good earth.
2. If several telephones are in use on different circuits at
one place the earths should be at least five yards apart, ten is
better, otherwise interference frequently results .
236. MORE THAN TWO TELEPHONES IN CIRCUIT.
If a third telephone is to be added to a circuit it should be
joined up in leak, that is, a piece of wire from one terminal
should be connected to a bared portion of the cable, and the
other terminal connected to earth.
237. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS OF INSTRUMENTS .
With telephone sets D Mk. II it is immaterial which of the
two terminals is attached to line and which to earth . With
D Mk. I the terminals marked DL and E should be used, CL
being used in place of DL when tapping a telegraph wire.
It is again immaterial which of the two is put to earth .
238. INTERNAL CONNECTIONS , D MK. I.
1. Telephone set portable D Mk. I consists of a complete
telephone with vibrator call, and space for a battery. It is
contained in a leather case , and weighs 4 lb. 6 ounces.
244 CHAP. XIII . -TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
2. The complete instrument consists of the following

parts : -
i. Battery, used both for speaking and calling.
ii. Vibrator, for calling.
iii. Push piece and switches , for actuating the vibrator .
iv. Induction coil.
v. Microphone, or transmitter for speaking.
vi. Receiver, for hearing .
vii. Two condensers.
3. The battery consists of a special double cell , the two
terminals of which are connected to screws in the shelf of the
vulcanite case. It can readily be removed with a screw-
driver when it fails , and another inserted . It is a separate
article of store, and must be separately demanded .
4. The vibrator consists of a coil of fine insulated wire form-
ing an electro-magnet. When a current from the battery is
passed through it, by means of the push piece, it causes an
armature to vibrate rapidly against a contact. The actuating
current itself passes through the armature and contact, con-
sequently the current flows and ceases very rapidly. The local
circuit is completed through the primary of the induction coil.
This induces an alternating current of great pressure in the
secondary of the induction coil, and passing through the line,
makes a buzz in the receiver of the distant station. The
vibrator should give a clear high buzz when the push piece is
pressed. It may be adjusted by moving the contact piece
slightly with a screw driver.
5. The induction coil consists of two insulated wires wound
round a soft iron core . One, the primary, is a short thick
wire, and forms part of the local circuit. Together with the
battery it is normally in circuit with the microphone, but is
switched to the vibrator by means of the push piece . The
other , the secondary, is a long thin wire, and is in the line
circuit at all times. A direct current from the battery ,
therefore, never goes to line , but an induced current from the
secondary of the induction coil is sent out.
6. The push piece actuates two switches simultaneously.
One puts the vibrator in the circuit with the primary instead
s. 239. 245
of the microphone, the other cuts out the receiver, so that

the buzzing call shall not be a nuisance at the sending
instrument.
7. The microphone is situated at the lower end of the hand
telephone, and forms part of the primary or local circuit. It
is, however, not in circuit until the switch in the handle of
the hand telephone is pressed, which must always be done
when speaking. A current then flows through the primary
circuit, and the vibration of the voice impinging upon the
microphone causes this current to vary in strength ; the
corresponding current induced in the secondary varies in a
similar manner , and causes sounds to be heard in the
receiver .
8. The receiver is situated in the upper end of the
hand telephone, and consists of an electro-magnet, close to
which is placed a diaphragm. When the current, passed
through the electro-magnet, varies, the diaphragm vibrates
and causes sounds, either of buzz or speech, similar to those
which made the current vary, at the other end.
9. Two condensers form part of the instrument ; the smaller
one is to diminish sparking at the contact of the vibrator ;
the larger is for working on a line which is already in use for
telegraphs, and as a telegraph wire carries a direct or battery
current, which is unable to penetrate a condenser , this enables
a telephone with a condenser in its line circuit to use the tele-
graph wire to talk or buzz on, without interfering with the
telegraph current. It is not brought into circuit unless
terminal CL is used.
239. SIMPLE TESTS .
1. The vibrator should buzz when the push piece is pressed ,
whether or no the line and earth terminals are joined up.
If it does not do so , first try if a slight adjustment of the
contact screw is necessary . This will be so , if on looking
carefully at the armature it appears to be trying to vibrate.
Next see that the contacts of the switch are clean . If it
still will not buzz, probably the battery requires renewing.
A disconnection of one of the wires is possible , but unlikely.
246 CHAP . XIII.- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS, &c.
2. To test the speaking portion join up DL and E by a

short piece of wire, and move the switch in the handle of the
hand telephone, when clicks should be heard in the receiver.
If this does not happen the most probable fault is a weak
battery : if, however, test 1 has proved this right, possibly
the diaphragm of the receiver may have been bent, and needs
reversing. When the cover of the receiver is screwed off, the
diaphragm may be tested by gently tapping with the finger-
it should give a hollow sound, as it should not be touching
the pole pieces of the magnet. If damp has reached the
microphone it may be clogged-if a sharp shakes does not set
it right a new hand telephone should be obtained-on no
account should the microphone be opened except by a trained
man.
3. If DL and E are joined by a piece of wire, and the
switch in the hand telephone is pressed, blowing on the micro-
phone should be distinctly audible in the receiver .
240. INTERNAL CONNECTIONS, D MÊ. II.

1. Telephone set, portable D Mk. II, differs from Mk. I
more in construction and accessibility than in design, though
this is not quite the same. It is included in a somewhat
similar leather case, and weighs 5 lbs. 6 oz.
2. The battery consists of two " Cells, electric dry S,"
which must be demanded separately.
3. The vibrator is stronger and larger, and the adjusting
screw is more powerful, and can be moved with the fingers
or with a coin .
4. There is only a single switch, which brings the vibrator
into the primary circuit when the push is pressed . The
receiver is always in the line circuit.
5. The induction coil is generally similar to Mk. I.
6. The microphone is a separate instrument of the watch
type. It is brought in circuit by means of a press button in
the case, which must always be held down when speaking.
The carbon shot are contained in a capsule , which can be
exchanged if necessary. When in use, the microphone should
s. 241 . 247
be held in a vertical position and about three inches from the

mouth.
7. The receiver is fitted with web straps for attachment to
the head .
8. The condensers are generally similar to those of Mk . I.
The line condenser is always in circuit.
241. SIMPLE TESTS .
1. Vibrator as for Mk . I, but if the two terminals are
connected by a short length of wire loud signals should be
audible in the receiver.
2. To test the speaking portion join the two terminals by
a short piece of wire, and move the press button in the case
of the microphone , when clicks should be heard in the
receiver. Faults due to battery or receiver will probably
have already been detected in previous test. If these are
right, a dirty microphone switch or contact, a bad capsule ,
or bad contact with central contact point of capsule is the
most likely fault .
3. If the line terminals are joined together by a piece of
wire, and the microphone switch is pressed , blowing on the
microphone should be distinctly audible in the receiver.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING USE OF

TELEPHONES .
242. INTERRUPTED COMMUNICATION .
1. When communication is interrupted each operator
will :
i. Carefully test his own telephone and its connections .
ii . Endeavour to call up the distant telephone station by
repeated calls .
iii. If, after an interval of five minutes, communication
has not been restored, the N.C.O. in charge or senior
soldier at any station will send a man, or himself
proceed along the line to discover and repair the
fault .
248 CHAP . XIII . -TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS, &o.
Men should in this way start from both ends of a broken

line simultaneously and, passing the cable through
their hands and examining it, walk towards each
other until they meet.
If a break is found in the cable it will be repaired at
once .
If a spare telephone is available it should be taken ,
and occasionally connected up to see if the fault has
been passed. When discovered and repaired the
stations at each end of the line should be called up
to ascertain if the line is again in working order.
It must be remembered that the line may have been
cut in several places , and that to repair one break
only is not necessarily enough to re-establish com-
munication .
2. When it is necessary to establish communication, or to
localise a fault, at a place on the cable between joints in its
length, connection with the core can be made, without
stripping the insulation, by driving an ordinary pin or safety
pin through the insulation and the strands of wire. A tele-
phone can then be joined in circuit between this pin and an
" earth ."
3. When a message cannot be promptly sent either through
a temporary breakdown or a press of work, the non-com-
missioned officer or base operator will at once inform the
commanding or staff officer who is nearest the office.
243. CARE OF CABLE AND INSTRUMENTS.
1. The line once laid requires careful attention to keep it
in a state of efficiency . If required for more than a few
hours it must be patrolled by men detailed for the purpose,
known as " Linesmen . " This patrolling should certainly not
take place less than once a day, and if men are available, the
oftener it is done the better. Obvious faults should be
remedied, and the cable replaced when displaced. Cable
drums should not be left standing about in the sun.
2. Telephones should be tested at least once a week, in
order to see that the batteries are in good order. They
s . 244. 249
should be kept in a dry place. If there has been occasion to

use them in the rain, they should be thoroughly dried
immediately on return .
Ebonite swells in the heat and for this reason the pressel
switch of the D Mk. I is very liable to stick in a new tele-
phone. A little filing will overcome this.
244. INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF WRITTEN
MESSAGES THROUGH TELEPHONES IN THE FIELD.
1. Although the telephone is essentially an instrument for
conversation between officers it sometimes happens that
written messages, usually information and orders , have to be
sent and received through it.
2. In order to insure accuracy and to introduce a uniform
system, the following instructions have been drawn up for
the guidance of operators transmitting and receiving written
messages :
Operators using Telephones with vibrator calls when—

Sending a message- Receiving a message
i. Call up the station you On hearing a call reply
want by pressing the vibrator by pressing the vibrator
button and put the telephone button, put the telephone
receiver to your ear . receiver to your ear, then
wait.
ii. On hearing 66answering Answer sender's question
call, say " Hullo," Who are thus :
you ?" , ' Here, First Brigade
Head-Quarters ."
iii. Say " Message for." Get pencil and paper ready.
When ready to write say " Go
on.
iv. Dictate first the " num- Write down the group of
ber of words " and then words , repeating them slowly
three or four words of the as you write them. Be care-
message at a time , selecting ful not to repeat the last word
the groups of words according until you have finished writ-
to the sense of the message. ing it.
250 CHAP . XIII .- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
v. Spell out all names of Write down all words spelt

persons and places and all out to you in block capitals
words which are written in and after each word is written
block capitals . repeat the spelling.
vi. Transmit figures thus : Write down the figures as
10066 will be transmitted you receive them 10066 "
"6 Figures--one, double 0, repeat " Figures-one, double
double six, ten thousand and O, double six, ten thousand
sixty-six." and sixty-six."
vii. When the transmission Repeat the whole message.
of the(6 message is completed
say Message ends."
viii. When the message has 66
Say Good-bye ."
been correctly repeated say
"Correct" and if you have no
other messag 22 e to send say
Good-bye.'
3. When words are spelt on the telephone , the signalling
names of the letters (emma, toc, beer, &c. ) should invariably
be used.
4. Care should be taken not to shout into the telephone.
The natural pitch of voice should be used, but talking should
be clear and distinct and rather slow.
LAYING FIELD CABLES .
245. PACE OF LAYING .

1. In open country the pace at which cable can be laid is
limited only by the pace at which the wagon can move.
In close country, such as England , where provision must
be made for the security of the cable at road-crossings, gates ,
and in villages, the normal cable detachment, with a cable
wagon, should work at an average rate of 3 miles per hour.
If two detachments are available to lay one line, the pace
may be increased to 5 miles per hour . At night, when the
s. 246. 251
mounted men cannot work on their horses , progress is

necessarily slower, and it will seldom be possible to lay cable
faster than about 1 miles per hour.
2. As a general rule, cable lines will be required under con-
ditions when they must be laid quickly, and will be useless
unless they can be depended upon for the transmission of
messages.
To achieve this the detachment must be smart in drill , and
every part of the equipment must be in perfect condition .
The commander of a cable detachment should personally test
the cable and instruments and thoroughly inspect the wagon
and detachment to see that the equipment is complete and in
thorough working order.
246. DETAILS OF LAYING.
1. In laying cable lines the result to be aimed at is the
safety of the cable . No rules as to where the cable should
be laid can be given ; this must be decided by the particular
circumstances in every case. As a rule, the further it is
from metalled roads where much traffic will pass, the better.
Men and beasts will, especially at a check, move along the
sides of the roads.
The paying out should be so regulated that the cable lies
evenly on the ground everywhere. If it is stretched across
a hollow in the ground, and is thereby not in contact with
the ground, there is danger lest some one passing may trip
in it, and break or drag it out of place.
It should be stretched out without any strain on it, but
also without leaving it in loops or coils.
It should never be stretched off the ground across gates or
gaps in hedges through which men or animals may pass or in
any situation where it will interfere with traffic.
It should be laid out of sight if possible .
It should never be allowed to lie in water , or the current
will leak to earth .
2. If the cable is laid across an open space , care should be
taken to lay it just stretched on the ground , and it should be
pegged down every half mile.
252 CHAP. XIII .- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &C..
3. When the line follows a sandy track through bush or

heather, it is generally best to lay the cable flat in the track
where traffic passing over it will not injure it.
4. In laying cable in front of dwelling-houses it can be
allowed to lie on the surface of the ground, but it should then
be laid fairly tight , quite flat, and pegged down on each side
so as not to trip up men or horses.
5. The only safe position for cable passing through large
villages or towns is fastened high up on the buildings. This
entails slow progress, and in peace the consent of the
inhabitants is necessary. If it is absolutely necessary to pass
quickly through a town, and consequently to take risks , the
best place for the cable is the gutter by the side of the foot-
path. The cable should be frequently tied down to the grat-
ings of the surface drains , or to pegs.
6. Cable lines should be laid as far apart from each other
as possible. If two lines lie alongside each other for any
considerable distance, the signals on one line interrupt the
signals on the other owing to electrical induction.
7. When cable lines cross roads or tracks the cable should
be raised at least 15 feet over the roadway or should be buried
under the surface .
The cable should only be buried across soft and unmetalled
tracks. Buried crossings are liable to cause earth faults in
wet weather.
When a pole crossing is necessary, a hole 18 inches deep is
made for each pole with a hammer and jumper. The tops of
the poles are held over the holes , the cable is stretched
between them and made fast to the tops of the poles by means
of clove hitches taken in the cable. Sufficient slack should
be left in the cable on each side of the crossing to admit of
the poles being raised and of the cable being tied to their
bases after erection . The poles are then simultaneously
raised into their holes and are stayed back with one guy line
each .
The guy lines are made fast to trees, fences, or any other
available holdfast , or, if none are available, to pegs which
will be driven into the ground .
8. 247. 253
If buildings or trees, to which the cable can be attached

are available, the line should cross by these.
A road may also be crossed by means of one pole and one
house or tree attachment. In this case the pole will be
erected first, and the cable will be drawn taut over the road
from the top of the pole to the house or tree to which it will
be attached.
8. When a cable line has to cross a railway it should be cut
and passed under the rails . Care should be taken to keep
it clear of all railway points.
9. The best way of making cable fast to a projection on
a building, tree, fence, the foot of a pole at a crossing or to
any other holdfast is by making a barrel hitch with a piece
of spunyarn through a loop or coil of the cable, and tying off
the ends of the spunyarn to the holdfast.
Occasionally it may be found more convenient to make a
clove hitch with a bight of the cable round a stout holdfast,
such as a large bough or a fencing post. If this is done, care
must be taken to see that the end of the bight is secured so
that the spring of the steel in the cable will not cause the
clove hitch to become slack .
10. In many places it is necessary, and in any case it is
advisable, frequently to tie the cable back to gates, hedges ,
and fences on the side of the road .
Tying back is especially necessary when the cable follows
the outside of a curve in the road, where it is liable to be
dragged across the road if any strain comes on it.
The cable should be tied back as near to the ground as
possible.
247. TEMPORARY JOINTS .
The outer end of the cable on each drum will always be
kept prepared for jointing as follows : -
The insulation should be stripped from a point 1 inch from
the end of the cable for about 3 inches , and a piece of india-
rubber tubing ( Pipe , hose, I.R. , inch) from 5 to 6 inches
long should be slipped on to the cable.
The inner end of the cable on each drum is similarly pre-
pared, but has no tubing on it.
254 CHAP. XIII .-TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
When a joint has to be made the ends of the cable will be

tied together by a reef knot which will be formed on the
uninsulated part of the cable.
This knot will be drawn as tight as possible to ensure good
contact. The indiarubber tubing will then be drawn over
the joint to insulate it.
Whenever it is necessary to make a temporary joint in
cable the ends will be prepared , and the joint will be made
and insulated as described above.
The short length of insulation left at the end of the cable
serves to hold the strands of the cable together .
248. EARTHS .
The earth of the circuit on the cable wagon is formed by
the contact of the tyres of the wheels with the ground.
In dry weather this earth is often found insufficient to give
good signals . An earth pipe is provided on the wagon to
supplement this, and whenever the wagon is halted to send
or receive messages this additional earth should be used.
ARTILLERY BRIGADE EQUIPMENT AND DRILL .
249. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.

1. Field telephone equipment is supplied to brigades of
artillery as a means of communication between a brigade
commander and his battery commanders .
2. The adjutant is responsible for communication by means
of telephone, and is assisted by the brigade sergeant-major
and brigade-trumpeter . He has at his disposal : -
i. A brigade cable cart, which carries cable, telephones,
tools , 12 poles and a ladder for crossings , and flags
for signalling .
s. 250. 255
ii. The cart detachment consists of a cart commander

who is mounted, 2 dismounted gunners (No. 1 and
No. 2) , one of whom should be a signaller , and a
driver (A.S.C.) .
iii. Three mounted telephone operators (one supplied from
each battery) , known as brigade-end operators , who
should also be signallers . They carry flags.
Each battery, in addition to the brigade-end operator, pro-
vides a battery-end operator. This man is also a signaller ,
and rides with the battery commander. His duty is to com-
municate by telephone or flag with the brigade-end operator
furnished by his own battery. He is assisted , when neces-
sary , by the senior battery range-taker, and is entirely dis-
tinct from the battery telephone operators .
3. The cable cart and detachment accompany the brigade
commander when he advances to reconnoitre the position, not
necessarily following him closely, but under the general direc-
tions of the adjutant .
When the brigade commander has selected his observing
position and the position of the three batteries , the adjutant,
or one of his subordinates, then takes charge of the cart and
lays the line.
The principle is that the telephone line is used to connect
the brigade commander with the battery commanders , not
with the batteries themselves. Therefore, if the battery
commanders observe their fire from points at some distance
from their batteries, it is to these points that the line is laid .
If one or more of the battery commandersobserve from the
brigade commander's position, lines from the brigade com-
mander to them are not required . In this case a pair of
operators will be available for communication with the
brigade ammunition column.
250. PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS .
1. In order that communication may be opened up by tele-
phone between the brigade commander and his batteries with
the least possible delay, it is essential that the detachment
should be thoroughly trained in laying the cable rapidly and
256 OHAP . XIII .-TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
reliably, and that the equipment should be in good working

order .
2. One of the dismounted gunners is told off as limber
gunner and is responsible that the equipment of the cart is
present and in good order, cable tested and ends prepared ,
telephones working, wheels greased , gear of cart cleaned and
oiled , oil can and grease box filled . Care should be taken
when winding the cable on the drum that about 12" of the
inner end of the cable is allowed to project through the hole
in the side of the drum to admit of a reef knot being tied in
the cable when it is necessary to connect to another length
of cable and so prevent any strain being brought on the
coupler (see Sec. 251 , 11). The cart commander will per-
sonally test the cable and telephones .
3. Before commencing work the cart commander will
ensure that the detachment is in possession of the following
equipment :
Commander-Pliers , knife, crookstick , whistle, spunyarn
and two pegs .
No. 1. Pliers , knife , whistle , spunyarn , apron and
gloves.
No. 2. Pliers, knife and spunyarn .
4. The cart is taken to the point at which the laying of the
cable is to commence . On the command " Commence Work "
the operator at the point takes an earthpin from the cart
and connects up his instrument. No. 1 pays out slack, drives
a peg in and attaches the cable to it, then hands the loose
end of the cable to the operator. No. 2, if necessary, takes a
hammer from the cart, and then takes his seat on the front
box of the cart. When the start is from the brigade com-
mander's position , the three earthpins should be driven in
before starting. When connected up the operator puts his
foot on the cable until the strain is off.
251. METHOD OF LAYING THE CABLE.
1. There are three methods of laying the line, known as
starfish (Fig. 1) , half-doubled (Fig. 2) , and long line (Fig. 3).
Modifications and combinations of these methods may be used
according to circumstances . The object is to establish com-
munication quickly and to finish, if possible, with the cart at
the brigade commander's position .
s. 251 . 257
2. Starfish : -The cart being with the brigade commander

at " X ," and the battery commanders being at " A," " B,"
Fig. 1. Starfish.
B C
and
66 " C," the cart proceeds to " A," and lays a line from
"A," to " X," it then lays a line from " X," to " B, " pro-
ceeds to " C," and lays a line from " C " back to " X. "
66 3. Half-double : -The line is laid outwards from " X " to
"A " ; the cart then proceeds from " A " to " C," then
returns viâ " B," to ' X," laying the lines 66 CBX " and
“ BX .” From "B" to X two lines are laid
simultaneously. Or the line may be laid half-doubled from
Fig. 2.-Half-doubled .
B c
" X " to "A " and " B," the cart returning viâ " C." To
avoid induction when laying a half-doubled line the cart
commander should bear off one cable with his crookstick so
that the cables lie at least 5 yards apart.
258 CHAP . XIII .- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
4. Long-Line : -If " X , 26 A,' " B," and " C " are all
in one long line, a single line may be laid starting from " X "
through " A " and " B " to " C," where the line is put to
earth . This method is objectionable , since the three
Fig. 3.- Long Line.

A B C
batteries cannot talk at once and any interruption disables

the whole line . It takes less cable than the other methods
and has sometimes to be used on that account.
5. The cable should be laid in a position secure from
damage by traffic, and should not be a source of danger to
vehicles, horses, or individuals.
6. The commander is responsible for the laying of the
cable, the working of the telephones, and the discipline and
disposal of the detachment. When running out the cable his
position is in rear of the cart, i.e. , laying the cable in a safe
place at the side of the road, &c. , by means of the crookstick .
He controls the pace of the drivers with a whistle, one blast
being the signal to go a slower pace , viz . , trot to walk or
walk to halt, and two or three short blasts a faster pace,
i.e., halt to walk or walk to trot. A long and strong blast
brings the team to a halt at once. The pace at which the
cart is moved depends on circumstances.
7. No. 1 sits on the seat at the back of the cart. He wears
an apron and glove to prevent the cable from cutting his
clothes or hands. As the cart moves along No. 1 with his
hands pulls the cable off the drum at such a speed that the
cable is always slack on the ground behind the cart. On no
account is he to allow the strain on the cable due to movement
s. 251. 259
of cart to pull the cable off the drum ; all the pulling off must
be done by hand .
The cable must be pulled off freely when going round the
outside of a curve. No. 1 must prevent the slack catching
on any part of the cart, and blow his whistle if this , or a
kink, or tangle, should occur.
8. No. 2 sits on the box of the cart. When the com-
mander dismounts to tie back, &c. , he walks behind guiding
the cable into a suitable place with the crookstick .
9. The cart itself must never be brought up on to the
observing position . Either the end of the line is led up or
the drum carried up by the two gunners with the carrier bar.
The line should not be brought to the observing position
by a frequented path. If possible it should be led round and
brought in from the front, where orderlies are not likely to
trip over it. Twenty yards of slack should be left at each
end ; this allows the operator to shift his position, and pre-
vents the instrument from being pulled out of his hand if the
line is fouled .
The cart must, as far as possible, keep out of sight of the
enemy, not only because it is likely to be hit, but because it
betrays the position of the observing points or of the
batteries.
10. It is often necessary to communicate by signal with the
cart when on the move ; when this is anticipated the detach-
ment should be cautioned to look out for calls .
11. When it is necessary to make a joint the commander
dismounts , takes the ends of the cables and stands on the
new cable, with a turn of it round his foot to take any strain
from the cart while making the joint. He ties the two cables
together by means of a reef knot about 1 foot from their ends
and then connects the couplers . The reef knot is tied to
prevent any strain being brought on the couplers . The joint
should, if possible , be hung up in a bush out of the wet and
hidden from sight, as it is apt to excite the curiosity of
passers by. The empty drum should be placed out of the way
of passers by.
12. When it is necessary to carry the cable across a track
or road , the commander will decide quickly how the crossing
is to be built. It must be made so that the cable is neither
260 CHAP. XIII.- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c .
in danger of being damaged itself nor is a source of danger

to others, while at the same time economising material, as
the cart only carries six pole crossings for four miles of cable.
13. The cable should be buried under any crossing of
importance when the road is not macadamised. The com-
mand is " Bury Crossing. " At other crossings the cable
should be poled , or trees utilised to tie it up. The com-
mands are " Pole Crossing, '22 ' Pole and Tree Crossing,"
" Tree Crossing.
14. The details given in Section 246 also apply.
252. BURY CROSSING.
On the command 66 Bury Crossing, " the cart halts beyond
the crossing .
No. 1 pays out slack , gets a shovel from the cart, and digs
out the trench picked by No. 2, starting at the furthest end
from the cart. He replaces his shovel and gets ready to pay
out again.
No. 2 gets a pick from the cart and picks out a trench
starting at the furthest end from the cart. He replaces his
pick, gets his crookstick , and lays the cable behind the cart.
The commander directs the numbers where to dig the
trench. He hands his horse to the driver, lays the cable in
the trench, covers it over, and makes fast the cable with
spunyarn to a peg or natural holdfast, standing on the cable
till the strain is off. He gets his horse from the driver before
making fast, and when his foot is on the cable gives " Walk
March."
253. POLE CROSSING.
1. On command " Pole Crossing, " the cart halts beyond
the crossing. The commander directs the numbers where to
make the crossing, using suitable natural holdfasts instead of
pegs if possible .
No. 1 pays out 12 yards of slack, gets a double pole , guy
line , insulator, and peg, and works furthest from the cart.
He puts the pole together, and makes fast the cable to the
top of it with a clove hitch, allowing slack enough behind
him to reach down the pole, and leave a little slack at the
s 254. 261
bottom, and makes fast the guy to the top of the pole . He
holds the pole over the hole for the commander to measure
the length of cable in the crossing , raises it with him on the
word " Up, " places it in the hole and presses it down firmly.
He then makes fast the guy line to the peg or natural hold-
fast and takes his seat on back of the cart.
No. 2 gets a hammer and jumper from the cart and jumps
the holes, starting furthest from the cart. He points out the
hole to No. 1 , putting a small stick or stone over it to mark
it if the hole happens to be in long grass. He drives in the
pegs , being careful that they are in line with the crossing.
He then ties down the slack on the pole furthest from the
cart, and with a crookstick lays cable behind the cart until
the commander arrives.
2. The commander hands his horse to the driver, gets a
double pole, guy line, insulator , peg and spunyarn . He
works at the hole nearest the cart, puts the pole together,
makes fast the cable to the top with a clove hitch, holding
the top of the pole over the hole and pulling the cable up
tight to No. 1's pole, which is being held in a similar manner.
When he has done this he gives the word " Up , " and raises
his pole, at the same time as No. 1 , and presses it down
firmly. He then makes fast his guy line , seeing that the
cable is taut across the top of the crossing . He then gets
his horse, puts his foot on the cable, and ties down the slack
to the foot of the pole with spunyarn .
The commander is responsible that the numbers leave the
crossing in a safe condition , i.e. , with pegs in line with the
crossing and the cable taut across the top.
254. TREE CROSSING.

On the command " Tree Crossing " the cart halts beyond
the crossing. The commander directs the numbers which
trees to use and how far up to tie the cable.
No. 1 pulls out 12 yards of slack, goes up the tree furthest
away from the cart, and makes fast.
262 CHAP . XIII .-TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &o.
No. 2 goes up the tree nearest the cart, pulls the cable
taut across and makes fast. He then with a crookstick lays
the cable behind the cart until the commander arrives .
The commander holds his horse and ties down the cable at
the foot of the trees, starting furthest from the cart. He
puts his foot on the cable until the strain is off.
255. REELING UP.

1. The commander is responsible for the whole party. His
position is about 10 yards in rear of cart . He must watch
No. 1 and No. 2 closely. He uses his whistle in the same
way as when paying out, and must be quick to stop the cart
if the cable gets caught up anywhere . He will see that the
lead driver follows the cable where possible, keeping it about
two yards clear of his horses.
2. The commander holds up the cable in his crookstick
while it is being wound on to the drum. He should hold his
crookstick in the hand on the side on which the cable has
been laid, and should hold near the crook, pressing the butt
forward when a strain comes on the cable. In reeling up
round a corner he should ride well away towards the opposite
direction to that in which the cart is turning, pulling both
returns of the cable with him, to prevent it from catching in
the wheels of the cart. If by mischance he drops the cable,
he should gallop forward to the cart and pick it up again
close to the drum.
3. No. 1 sits on the seat in rear of the cart and lets the
cable run through his hand as it is pulled in , distributing it
evenly over the drum. When the cart halts at crossings , &c. ,
he recovers stores . He blows a blast on his whistle if the
cable gets kinked up.
4. No. 2 sits on the box of the cart and switches on and off,
taking care to keep the commander about 20 yards in rear of
the cart. He should switch on and off rapidly so as to keep
the drum running freely.
s. 256. 263
BATTERY EQUIPMENT AND DRILL .

1. In action the battery commander when at a distance
from his battery communicates with it by means of telephone
or signallers.
2. The battery telephone detachment consists of two
mounted operators (No. 1 and No. 2) , who are also signallers ,
and a mounted horseholder.
3. Each operator carries a " telephone, set portable, D "
on his belt. On each side of his horse he carries a reel with
290 yards of light cable, one of which reels he places in a
socket on his belt on the order to prepare for action . On the
off side of his saddle, or strapped just below the right knee, he
carries an earthpin. He also carries two signalling flags , a
pouch with implements, and a message book with pencil .
The reel is so pivoted that the cable runs off freely and can
be laid by either a mounted or dismounted man .
4. Before commencing work No. 1 will see that he himself
and No. 2 are each in possession of equipment as follows :-
i. On person.-Belt with portable telephone set and
connecting leads ; pouch containing cutting pliers ,
emery-paper, rubber tubing, and spare binding
screw ; clasp knife ; message book and pencil .
ii. On saddle.- Two filled reels complete with spindles ,
binding screws, and couplers ; one earthpin with
binding screw ; two signalling flags.
No. 1 is responsible that the equipment is complete and in
good order, cable tested, ends , binding screws, and clips
bright . The captain of the battery will personally test the
cable and telephones .
257. METHOD OF LAYING THE CABLE.

1. The cable should be laid in a position secure from traffic,
and should allow freedom of movement to the operator at
each end.
264 CHAP. XIII . — TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &o.
2. At the order to prepare for action, Nos . 1 and 2 each

take a reel from the saddle and place it in the socket on the
belt . Each also takes the earthpin from the saddle, if not
carried on the person, connects it to his telephone , and places
it in the loop of his belt.
3. The battery commander points out the observing position
and the position of the battery. The detachment trots to a
point midway between these two positions, and halts. Nos . 1
and 2 connect the running ends of their cables together
with the couplers provided and ride or walk in opposite
directions. The cable may safely be laid at a steady trot,
but little is to be gained by riding unless the total distance
exceeds a quarter of a mile. When both numbers ride, the
horseholder follows No. 1 , takes his horse, returns for No. 2's
horse, and takes the horses to join the battery staff horses.
On arrival at his position , each number connects his tele-
phone to line, drives in his earthpin, and is then ready to
send or receive messages .
4. No. 2 should take post 20 yards in front of the battery
until the limbers have gone to the rear, otherwise his line
will be cut by the limbers driving over it .
5. The instructions given in Section 246 are to be observed
when laying battery cable, as far as they apply.
258. REELING UP.
1. Each operator places his earthpin in his belt and his

telephone in its case and walks down the line, reeling up as
he goes . When the operators meet at the joint they
uncouple the cable. The horseholder with the operator's
horses proceed to the centre of the line . The operators
mount and rejoin their battery.
2. The practice of sending the horseholder to uncouple the
cable, and of reeling in the cable from the two ends of the
line, is forbidden, as it quickly destroys the insulation . This
method does not save time.
3. On an emergency, when the battery has to advance at
once, if each operator has still a reel unused , the reels and
s. 259. 265
cable in use may be left on the ground, to be recovered after-

wards. No. 2 will report to the Captain that the order
" Abandon Cable ‫ دو‬has been given ; the Captain will, if
possible, leave two men to reel up and follow the battery.
Failing this he will send back for the cable at the next
opportunity.
259. EARTHS .
A bad earth makes hearing indistinct. It may be
improved by watering the ground . The earthpin, or a clasp
knife, may be driven into a tree ; or an iron fence , water
pipe, or other metallic object fixed in the ground may be
used as an earth.
260. REPAIR OF CABLE .

After work, No. 1 is responsible that the equipment is
examined and cleaned, the cable overhauled , freed from
kinks , and repaired if necessary. Bare places should be
patched with rubber strip . Kinks must be carefully
straightened out . To join the cable the ends are bared for
three inches, emery-papered, joined with a reef knot, and
the joint covered with rubber strip .
INFANTRY BRIGADE EQUIPMENT AND DRILL .

1. An Infantry Brigade Telephone Section consists of :-
i . Two detachments , each of—
One pack animal and one driver .
One non- commissioned officer and five men .
ii. One cart and one driver.
Each pack-saddle is fitted with six drums , each carrying
half a mile of cable, one mattock, one crookstick, six earth-
pins, two wallets containing materials for repairs and small
266 CHAP. XIII.- TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &o.
gear, and one of the two pack-saddles carries the com-

mutator .
All non-commissioned officers and men, except the drivers ,
carry pliers and clasp knives. The non-commissioned officer
and
66 Nos. 1 , 2 and 3 of both detachments each carry one
' telephone, set portable, D."
The cart carries spare stores, including two miles of cable,
and may be used in emergencies to relieve the men of their
arms , equipment, and food.
2. Every man in the section should have a thorough know-
ledge of map reading, for individual men may have to run
out a cable alone, and will have to find their way to their
appointed stations by means of the map, sun, or compass.
3. Reliability in laying the cable is of the first importance ,
but it is also necessary that it should be laid rapidly. For
this reason thorough training is required and each man of
the detachment should be able to take his place at any of the
work.
262. TO LAY A SINGLE LINE.
1. On the command " Fall In " from the non-commissioned
officer in charge of a detachment, the men of the detachment
will fall in in single rank beside the pack-animal . The non-
commissioned officer will ascertain that the telephone equip-
ment on the pack-saddle and on the men is complete and
ready for work. He will then give the command " Tell Off,”
and the men will number from right to left.
2. On receipt of orders as to what work has to be per-
formed, where and in what direction the line has to be laid ,
and how much cable will be required , the non-commissioned
officer in charge of the detachment detailed will give the
word of command " Commence Work, " when :
No. 1 , who will be the base operator, will withdraw a piece
of wire from the leather pocket on the saddle, take an earth
pin from the case, and unroll five yards of wire from the
drum which is to be used. He will then with D II connect
the line wire to one terminal of his instrument and connect
the other terminal by a wire to the terminal on the earthpin .
No. 2 will put on the leather gloves .
s. 262. 267
No. 3 will take the crookstick from the saddle and fit it
together. He will join his telephone, by wires, to an earth-
pin, which he will plant in the ground, and to the terminal
of the drum of cable which is to be paid out. He will
exchange calls with No. 1 and report to the non-commissioned
officer in charge when the signals are satisfactory, thus test-
ing both telephones and the drum of cable.
No. 4 will take the mattock from the saddle .
No. 5 will get his map or compass ready so as to be pre-
pared to guide the detachment.
The non-commissioned officer will superintend the whole ,
and when all is ready he will give the command " Walk
March." On this command-
No. 1 will wrap a part of the slack cable round his foot and
stand on it.
No. 2 will guide the cable off the drum to prevent the cable
being caught up in the winding gear, and see that no hitch
occurs .
No. 3 will place the cable on the crookstick and follow the
pack animal at a distance varying according to circum-
stances, not usually less than 20 or 30 yards . He is absolutely
responsible for laying the cable safely.
3. No. 4 will be some distance ahead along the route to be
taken , and will, on seeing that‫دو‬the cable must be laid across
a road, call, “ Road Crossing . He will immediately com-
mence to pick a shallow trench through the surface of the
road, sufficiently deep to entirely bury the cable. On the
arrival of the pack animal at the road , No. 2 will pay out
enough loose cable to cross the road and to leave two or three
spare yards on either side after the completion of the
crossing. There is no need for the detachment to halt whilst
this duty is being carried out.
If No. 4 considers that a " Tree Crossing " is feasible he
will call out " Tree Crossing ," and will, with the assistance
of No. 5 , climb the trees on either side of the road , while
No. 3 assists to complete the work. In the meantime No. 2
will pay out enough cable to make the crossing and the knots
required .
4. Near
"" the completion of a drum No. 2 will call out " New
Drum , and the driver will halt the pack animal.
268 CHAP . XIII. TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS , &c.
No. 2 will thread the cable through the empty drum, join
the two cables together (the cable of the old drum to that of
the new), place the new drum on the upright, and when
ready will give the word of command " Walk March ."
After every joint No. 3 will again test the cable by exchang-
ing calls with No. 1. On arrival at the appointed place the
base will be called up, and one man will be detailed as
operator. If the station is likely to be in a fixed position for
some time, e.g. , on outpost, the party will be told off in
reliefs , the pack animal unloaded, and the bivouac pitched .
The earthpin should be driven into damp ground ; unless
the ground is wet or damp probably no signals will be
obtained .
If there is no wet ground a good " earth 99 can be obtained
by sticking the point of a knife well into any living tree or
bush.
5. It is better to lay cable on a fence if the cable is being
paid out along a road . If the cable is laid on the ground it
must be kept as low as possible , otherwise troops will trip
in it. This is especially necessary at headquarters, where
people are constantly walking about.
6. When halted at a terminal station the pack animal will
always be unloaded.
7. When it is notified that the general officer commanding
the brigade will be at a particular place , the non-commissioned
officer must decide where to put his telephone station , and
then always have sufficient cable slack on the ground, so
that the station can move, say 50 yards , to the actual posi-
tion the general takes up on arrival. The telephone must
go to the general, not the general to the telephone.
263. TO LAY TWO LINES AT THE SAME TIME FROM ONE BASE.
Each section will find a No. 1 to perform the duty of base
operator, and the commutator will be taken from its case on
the word " Commence Work. "
The base operators will attach the line cables to separate
numbered terminals on the commutator , and their telephones
by leads to separate lettered terminals and to separate
s 264. 269
earthpins , which should be at least 10 yards apart. They

will then by means of the plugs connect the lines to one or
separate telephones as required . They will take duty at the
telephones in turn . If a third line is required one detach-
ment will be told off to lay the line, the non-commissioned
officer in charge telling off one or two men to take drums off
the saddle and pay out cable as they advance, carrying the
drums.
264. REELING UP.
1. Reeling up the cable is far the most difficult and
arduous work that the section will have to perform, and it
is only through mutual support, great patience , and energy
that this duty can be consistently carried out in the best
manner. The men of a telephone detachment should try and
help each other at this task unselfishly , and all should take
a hand at the winding gear.
2. On the intimation that the cable can be reeled up and
work discontinued , the non-commissioned officer in charge,
or operator to whom the message or order is given , will give
the command " Load Up, " on which the driver will harness
the pack animal. The operator will let the base know that
a disconnection is to be made , informing him that he is going
to wind up 66 on the base ."
3. On the command " Commence Work," from the non-
commissioned officer in charge No. 5 will ""'stand to " the
handle of the winding gear, and the drum will be placed on
the standards.
No. 4 will now take the crookstick, place the cable upon
it, and follow the pack-animal at a distance of 30 or 40
yards.
No. 3 will relieve No. 5 at intervals .
No. 2 will be far in advance lifting the cable from the
crossings , clearing it and making it easy to pick up.
No. 1 remains at the base.
The non-commissioned officer in charge superintends the
work, and, when possible, helps No. 2.
If four stations are out and the cable has to be picked up
the operators at two of the stations will have to roll up the
cable by hand with the carrier bar supplied for that purpose.
270 APPENDIX.
APPENDIX I.
LIME-LIGHT (LARGE).
1. This apparatus is not issued to units, but is kept at

Schools of Signalling for instructional purposes and in store
for issue on special occasions.
2. The diagrams show the apparatus and names of the
various parts .
3. The light is obtained by forcing a jet of oxygen gas
mixed with the vapour of methylated spirit on to a lime
pencil , which raises it to a white heat at the point of impact .
1. The hood can be removed from the body by means of

hinged screw arms . It rests on four insulated lugs and is free
from the body of the lamp so that the heating of the spirit
chamber (N) is minimised. On the hood are : (a) sighting
tube (C) ; (b) holders (D), into which a service pattern sig-
nalling telescope can be fixed for aligning at long distances ;
(c) cowl (B) , which should be raised when the apparatus is in
use ; (d) handle (A) ; (e) the lens, 7 inches in diameter, having
a central plano-convex portion with two encircling lenticular
rings (E); (f) the shutter (F) , capable of being removed, it
is worked by means of the “ actuating button " (F¹) ; (g) two
talc windows with covers (G) , one on either side and e
aperture into which the key (S) is inserted ; (h) a door at the
back.
There is also a ""' gauze-covered opening on the left side of
the lamp .
E).
nits, but is kept at
urposes and in store
and names of the
jet of oxygen gas

spirit on to alime
the point ofimpact.
means of
b ody gs
ed b y d ee
at lu an isfr
heating of thespirit
d are: (a) sighting
service pattern sig-
at longdistances;
the appara tus isin
in diameter, having
encirclinglenticular
f being removed, it
tton "(F); (g)two
ither side and le
270
2. T
f
43
I .n
it
I
nd
1. ? eldor
Scho Overfl
for i later.
2. 2.
varic tected
3. The
mixe cham
penc cham
(P) w
the ba
circul
1. ing of
hing
from
chan
tube
nalli
(c) c
use ;
a ce
ring On
is w to ad
talc K) W
(
aper Oxyge
back. the su
p
Th uze-covered opening on the left side of aibpoe
the ut
APPENDIX I. 271
2. The lamp is adapted for use with the " stand Helio 10" ,"
f desired, placed on its own legs (W) on the ground .
1 on the stand a horizontal motion can be imparted by
s of the clamping screw (X). An adapter with a plain
mference and screwed internally to go on the head of
stand is used for this purpose .
The body consists of a spirit chamber (N) which must be

y filled with methylated spirit. It will last 6 hours .
nducting spirit pipe (Aa) fitted with common wick (which
seldom requires renewing) to such a height that the spirit
overflows into the vapourising chamber (R) , as explained
later.
2. A small auxiliary spirit lamp fits into one side , pro-
tected from the wind by flanges and a flame protector (T).
The flame of this lamp is situated under the vapourising
chamber (R) . The supply of this vapour to the mixing
chamber (P) is regulated by the key (S) . A mixing chamber
(P) which is a prolongation of the conducting (spirit) pipe to
the base of the gas conducting pipe (O ) has brass rings and
circular brass plates and wire gauze arranged in the follow-
ing order ::-
First a brass ring, then a plate having several holes ,
next a brass ring and above it a plate with only one
hole. The remaining 4 rings, 2 plates and gauze
follow in the same order . Above the last plate a
ring is placed and on it two pieces of wire gauze to
prevent dust getting into the nozzle , and to prevent
flash back.
: On the other side of the mixing chamber there is a channel
to admit oxygen as required by means of tap (M). The tap
(K) which should be given 2 full turns when in use, is to admit
oxygen into the spirit chamber (N) , the pressure of which on
the surface of the spirit forces it more rapidly up the wick in
pipe (Aa) into the vapourising chamber (R) . A pressure of
side of about 140 lbs . is necessary on the oxygen gas bag (Z) .
272 APPENDIX I.
3. A lime pencil, 1 inches by 14 inches, is fixed on to the

bracket (I) and by means of a regulator (U) , its position with
reference to the jet of gas is altered when necessary whilst in
use . By means of the clamp (Q) the pencil can be placed at
the correct distance from the nozzle, viz. , inch .
4. A safety valve (J) is provided to guard against the
possibility of explosion due to excessive pressure being
generated in the spirit chamber (N) .
5. The gas-bag (Z) and indiarubber tubing (Y) are those in
use at present with the smaller lime-light apparatus.
Mode of using Lamp.

1. Having nearly filled the spirit chamber (N) and filled
the auxiliary vapourising spirit lamp with methylated spirits ,
light the latter and place the desired amount of pressure on
the gas-bag.
2. The vapourising lamp is placed with the flame directly
underneath the vapourising chamber so that the spirit which
is conducted into the latter is converted into vapour by the
heat of the flame. As soon as it is ascertained that the
vapourising chamber is sufficiently hot (which can be done
by damping the finger and touching the vapourising chamber) .
turn on and light the vapour supply (S) and the gas-bag and
oxygen pressure taps . By means of this vapour flame the
lime pencil is warmed to prepare it for the extra heat it will
be subjected to when the oxygen gas is turned on. Should
the pencil be subjected to the intense heat of the combined
gases before warming, it will crack .
3. When the pencil is sufficiently warm the oxygen supply
tap (M) is turned on and by means of the vapour (S) and
oxygen supply tap (M) the correct mixture of the two gases
is obtained to raise the exposed portion of the pencil to a
white heat, and so the source of light is obtained . In the
above operations the spirit which is conducted into the
vapourising chamber is converted into gas, and by this means
the oxygen is consumed . The two gases become intimately
mixed in the mixing chamber and the combined gases pass
out of the nozzle .
APPENDIX I. 273
Under no circumstances must the spirit chamber (N) be

allowed to become empty, and care must be taken that the
pressure is not accidentally removed.
4. It will be found that the pencil will after a time become
indented by the force of the gas and consequently its position
must be altered by the regulator (U) .
To align the Lamp.

This is done by looking through the sighting tube and
getting the distant light or point in the centre by means of
the horizontal motion , or by moving the legs of the stand .
For long distances it is preferable to place a telescope in the
holders (D) focussing it, and getting the distant object in the
centre of the object glass.
To put out the Lamp.

Turn off the oxygen supply tap (M), turn off the oxygen
pressure tap (K) , turn off the hydrogen tap (S) and blow out
the vapourising lamp.
To renew wick in conducting pipe.

This should always be done by a mechanical expert and not
by a signaller, unless he has been properly instructed and
has the necessary tools .
OXYGEN GAS GENERATOR.

1. The apparatus required for generating the oxygen is
contained in a rectangular box 15 inches long by 7 inches
wide by 12 inches high . It is constructed of sheet metal and
holds :-
i. Two retorts.
ii. Spirit lamp .
iii. Spirit reserve tank.
iv. Oxygen cake magazine.
v. Connecting tubes (of metal if desired).
vi. Wash bottle.
vii. Combined cleaning rod and spanner .
274 APPENDIX I.
The box is divided longitudinally by iron bars, on which the

retorts rest when gas is being generated . (ii), (iii) and (iv)
are packed beneath the bars, the remainder of the items
being disposed above.
2. The lower front and the lid of the box are hinged to allow
of the removal of the contents , but when gas is being
generated they can be closed to protect the lamp , &c. , from
climatic influences, provision being made for adjusting the
opening of the lid to the desired amount.
3. The retorts are of a cylindrical pattern with a flange to
rest on the bars , being closed and secured by a domed cover
and screw clamp .
Each retort holds one oxygen cake.
4. A metal delivery tube is led from the top of the dome ,
and during generation projects through slots in each end of
the case .
5. The spirit lamp comprises a rectangular brass reservoir
with central wick chamber . Capacity 1 pints.
The reserve spirit tank is rectangular and made of sheet
metal . Capacity 3 pints .
6. The oxygen cake magazine is rectangular and made of
sheet metal, with divisions for holding 8 cakes . One cake can
also be carried in each of the retorts . These cakes are made
circular to fit the retorts , and consist of an intimate mixture
of potassium chlorate and binoxide of manganese (the service
ingredients), in the proportion of about 4 to 1 .
Each cake is in a highly compressed form, weighs 11 ozs .,
and gives off about 23 cubic feet of gas.
To generate the gas a cake is placed in one of the retorts ,
which is then closed and placed on the bars over the lighted
spirit lamp. The lid and front flap of the case are then closed
in order to protect the flame of the lamp , and to retain the
heat within as far as possible. The second retort is also
charged, placed on the bars, and allowed to take up what
heat it can in readiness for substitution for the first one as
soon as the latter has given up all its gas .
Oxygen commences to be given off after about 10 minutes'
application of heat.
APPENDIX I. 275
7. On issuing from the retort the gas is led by tubing to

the wash-bottle.
This latter consists of a rectangular sheet- iron receptacle,
provided with an inlet and outlet for the gas, and means for
introducing the washing water. The gas inlet is furnished
with a simple non-return valve, which prevents the return
of any gas towards the retort when a vacuum is created in
the latter on the complete dissolution of the cake it con-
tained.
8. From the wash-bottle the gas passes to the collapsible
gas-bag, which is the same as now used with the smaller
limelight apparatus.
9. The weight of the apparatus complete with all cases
and generators filled is about 40 lbs.
276 APPENDIX II.
APPENDIX II.
INDIAN SUPPLEMENT TO THE TRAINING

MANUAL SIGNALLING.
THE FOLLOWING PORTIONS OF THE TRAINING
MANUAL SIGNALLING, 1907, ARE INAPPLICABLE
TO INDIA (Vide I. A. O. No. 410 OF 1907) .
Section 32 , including drawing facing page 70.
Sections 33 to 47 , inclusive .
49 to 53, inclusive, including drawing on page 85 .
Section 57.
,, 58, paragraph 5 , last three lines .
58, paragraph 6, words in brackets .
Sections 59 to 71, inclusive, including drawings on page 94,
95 and 96.
Section 92.
99 94, the last two clauses from the words " The
telescope " to end of section.
228, and General Instructions .
Sections 231 and 232 .
33
AINING
TRAINING
PLICABLE NE S
H H RE NY
O T C A
R
G
n page 85.
1 page 94,
is "The
UL. p with cap and chain and leather strap.

32. Adjusting nut.
33. Socket for socket nut and connecting lever ,
!
THE
NCHERAR
RARY
APPENDIX II. 277
THE HELIOGRAPH .
1234B6NO
COMPONENT PARTS .
1. Screw, steel , elevating.

2. 99 spring beat.
3. 22 connecting forked end elevating screw.
4. "" " trunnion .
5. regulating beat with check nut.
6. brass , plain end elevating nut.
7. 99 steel, swivel-joint connecting lever .
8. ‫دو‬ connecting lever to baseplate.
9. "" "" securing mirror to frame.
10. 99 brass, socket nut .
11. connecting crown -wheel to baseplate.
12. Spindle, steel worm, traversing .
13. Screw, brass, clamping large end of arm.
14 . 22 small ""
15. "" securing head of screw steel worm
traversing.
16. Screw, brass, clamping bar lengthening.
17. Nut, gland screw steel worm traversing.
18. Rod , sighting.
19. Bar, lengthening.
20. Arm .
21. Frame U duplex.
22. Nut, butterfly.
23. Body, signalling mirror , with bridge complete .
24. Frame, mirror, signalling.
25. duplex .
26. Nut, elevating screw.
27. Socket nut, elevating screw.
28. Washer, socket nut, elevating screw.
29. Nut 22
30. Spring beat.
31. Tripod with cap and chain and leather strap .
32. Adjusting nut.
33. Socket for socket nut and connecting lever.
278 APPENDIX II.
34. Sling, tripod , leather, two half straps and two sockets.
35. Case, leather, with shoulder and waist straps.
36. Spanner.
37 . "" elevating nut.
38. Case, mirror, with one spare signalling mirror and one
spare duplex mirror.
39. Box, containing following : -
Screws, one each of Nos . 2 , 3, 4, 5 (without check nut) ,
6, 7 and 8 ; two brass plates each containing 6
screws of No. 9 ; (3" one plate) two spare springs .
40. Oil bottle .
41. Lever.
42. Plate, tripod .
43. Screw, fixing plate of tripod .
44. Bolt, fixing leg of tripod .
45. Anchoring hook.
1. Now nt in the sighting rod or duplex mirror accord.
to the direction of the distant station .
APPENDIX II. 279
TO SET UP THE HELIOGRAPH .
The heliograph is a delicate instrument and should always

be carefully handled . In removing it from the leather case
it is grasped by the base of the U-frame . It must be removed
quietly from its case, as the projecting parts are liable to
catch in the partitions of the case, and cause damage to it as
well as straining the heliograph.
2. Next take out the arm, fix it on the heliograph facing
towards the front of the mirror, and clamp it tight. Now
screw the heliograph on the tripod , turning it round and
pressing it home by the arm. No force should be used either
in screwing it on or taking it off. It must not be pressed
home by the U-arms as the crown-wheel is liable to be injured ,
a strain being brought to bear on the thread of it.
3. It frequently happens that heliographs, after being
exposed some time to a hot sun , jam on the tripod . This is
caused by their being originally screwed on too tight, and the
heat causing the metal to expand, a jam is the consequence.
4. A lengthening bar is issued with all heliographs which
can be fixed in the hole at the end of the arm. The sighting
rod is placed in the hole at the end of this lengthening bar
and clamped by means of a clamping screw. When the
lengthening bar is used there is no necessity for unclamping
the arm when laying the heliograph.
5. The only objection to the use of the lengthening bar is
that the sighting rod is less rigid than when fixed in the hole
at end of the arm .
6. Next set the tripod with the signalling mirror roughly
facing the sun ; the legs should not be too close together ,
especially in old instruments, where the joints of the legs are
apt to be worn and loose ; also the whole instrument is more
liable to be upset and damaged ; neither should they be too
far apart, as they are liable to be kicked . The legs should
roughly form the angles of an equilateral triangle .
7. Now fit in the sighting rod or duplex mirror according
to the direction of the distant station.
280 APPENDIX II.
8. If it is in the same direction as the sun, the sighting rod

is used : if in the opposite direction , the duplex mirror must
be employed . In any case , the signalling mirror roughly faces
the sun.
9. Having put in the sighting rod or duplex mirror, clamp
moderately tight by the clamping screw at the end of the
arm, clamp the butterfly nut of the duplex mirror and clamp
the lever down by the beat-regulating screw .
The heliograph is now ready for laying.
TO LAY THE HELIOGRAPH.
When using the sighting rod it can be laid either from the
rear or front :·
(1 ) Kneeling behind the heliograph look through the
hole in the mirror and, taking hold of the two
nearest legs , shift them about so as to elevate or
depress the instrument until the distant station ,
sighting rod and centre of the hole in the sig-
nalling mirror are in one straight line.
(2) If it is inconvenient to move the legs of the tripod,
unclamp the arm (if not using the lengthening
bar) and also the screw which clamps the sighting
rod , then look at the distant station through the
hole in the mirror, and , by raising or lowering the
sighting rod, and moving the arm horizontally
right or left the correct alignment is obtained .
(3) Raise the tripod with the left hand in such a manner
that the fingers assist in keeping the legs apart,
then move the heliograph round until the reflection
of light is roughly in the direction of the distant
station, place the tripod on the ground , take an
alignment over the top of the mirror, unclamp and
move the arm until it is in line with the eye and
the distant station . Move to the front of the
mirror, and by raising or lowering the sighting rod ,
APPENDIX II. 281
and moving the arm horizontally right or left,

obtain the correct alignment and clamp the rod
and arm .
2. In laying the heliograph from the front , stand in front

and to one side of the mirror , and looking into it move the
head or the mirror by means of the traversing and elevating
screws until the distant station is reflected exactly on the
spot in the mirror, unclamp the clamping screws of the arm
(if not using the lengthening bar) and sighting rod and move
respectively vertically up or down, and horizontally right or
left, until the reflections of the cross lines on the rod pass
through the distant station and also through the centre of
the unsilvered spot. Each line should cut the unsilvered spot
in half the adjustment being made first with the line of
elevation and secondly with the line of direction , then clamp
the arm and sighting rod.
3. When laid from the rear the alignment may be checked
by looking at the reflection in the mirror from the front.
4. Now, by means of the elevating and traversing screws ,
adjust the angle of the signalling mirror till the centre of the
flash, indicated by a small round shadow, the shadow of the
hole in the centre of the signalling mirror, is on the cross
lines . This shadow is called the " shadow spot " or simply
the " spot. ""
5. The heliograph is now laid , the light is on the distant
station , and the key depressed ; so that, on unscrewing the
beat-regulating screw and releasing the lever, it is ready for
work, and on depressing the key with the fingers the flash
will be thrown on the distant station . If the beat-regulating
screw is not clamped down at first the light is liable to be
adjusted with the lever up, and on depression the light is
thrown off the station. This is avoided if a rule be made
always to clamp all the screws at first. The screw at the end
of the arm and also the screw of the U-frame of the duplex
must not be jamed, but only screwed up so far that the duplex
mirror will move stiffly.
282 APPENDIX II .
WITH DUPLEX MIRROR.
6. The dupex mirror when used should always be pressed

down till the U-frame touches the arm, or nearly so , to avoid
unnecessary shaking.
7. The method of laying with the duplex mirror is as
follows : proceed as in (3) for laying with the rod , the reflec-
tion of light being thrown on to the duplex mirror instead of
the distant station, the arm having been previously placed at
the required angle, stand facing the signalling mirror and
place the eye in such a position that the circle in the centre
of the signalling mirror covers the top of the reflection of the
white line on the duplex mirror thus The duplex mirror
is now (without moving the eye) turned on its vertical and

horizontal axis till the reflection of the distant station is
brought exactly in line with the eye, the centre of the sig-
nalling mirror and reflection of the top of the sighting line
on the duplex mirror . As the point will be obscured from
view when exactly in line, by raising the eye the three will
appear in a vertical line, which will check the lateral direction ,
similarly by moving the eye a little right or left until the
three appear in a horizontal line, the elevation will be
checked .
8. The shadow spot is now adjusted on the duplex mirror
in the same manner as in the case of the sighting rod :
unclamp the beat-regulating screw, and the heliograph is
ready for work.
9. Whichever station is ready first should show a steady
light, to enable the other to lay their heliograph by. As soon
as the latter shows a good light, the former should check the
laying of their own, as a bright light is naturally easier to
lay upon than a mere point in the landscape.
APPENDIX II. 283
4
TO SIGNAL WITH THE HELIOGRAPH .
When not actually signalling, the shadow spot should be

kept about to 3 inch below the cross line of the sight . If
the spot falls too low through the beat of the lever being too
long , the instrument is unduly shaken in working it, and
the lever will not always be pressed fully down, so that the
light does not reach the station. This is especially the case
if the lever spring be at all stiff. On the other hand, if the
beat be too short, the flash is not properly turned off the
distant station . The result is that there is only partial ,
instead of complete, obscuration between the flashes ; they
are consequently not so easily read . Before commencing
work the lever should always be depressed by hand to see
that the spot comes up to the proper place. In old instru-
ments in which the screws and joints are worn and loose it
will often happen that on commencing to signal , the spot
jumps up above the proper height or perhaps does not rise
high enough . Such faults can usually be corrected by
tightening the screws , for which purpose every heliograph
has a spanner.
2. Any considerable elevation or depression of the sig-
nalling mirror can be obtained by unclamping the brass screw
connecting the plain end of the elevating nut, thus allowing
the plain end to move freely in the socket .
3. The approximate elevation or depression can then be
obtained, the plain end clamped and the exact adjustment
made with the elevating screw. A more rapid adjustment
and a great saving in the wear and tear of the thread of the
elevating screw is thus effected . This point should be
impressed upon all signallers .
5
TO PACK UP THE HELIOGRAPH .
Unclamp the check nut, clamp the screw regulating beat

and check nut, bring the signalling mirror flush with the
284 APPENDIX II.
U-frame, remove the sighting rod or duplex mirror and place

it in the case, grasp the tripod just below the head with the
right hand, seize the arm with the left hand and unscrew the
heliograph to the left and continue unscrewing, passing the
arm from hand to hand , until the heliograph is released from
the tripod, then turn the heliograph up into the left hand
grasping it with the first two fingers , one on either side of
the bridge, thumb on top of screw brass connecting crown-
wheel to baseplate.
2. Unclamp and remove the arm and place the arm and
heliograph in the case , close the case and buckle the strap .
3. All screws must be clamped and flush with their com-
ponents.
4. Replace the cap on the tripod and strap the legs together.
TO REPLACE A BROKEN MIRROR BY A NEW ONE.
Detach the elevating screw by removing the screw in the

forked end, take out the trunnion screw and remove the
mirror from the U-frame ; mark the rim (for securing the
mirror) and mirror frame so that there will be no difficulty in
replacing the rim in its proper position ; take out the small
screws on the side of the mirror frame ; remove the rim and
broken mirror and insert the new one , replace the rim and
small screws and connect the mirror frame to U-frame and
elevating screw .
7
THE CHIEF CAUSES OF DEFECTS IN A HELIOGRAPH OWING TO
WHICH THE LIGHT MAY BE UNSTEADY AND DIFFICULT TO READ .
(1) The tripod may be shaky, the legs not being firmly
fixed on the ground , or the joints of the legs may
be loose, from the screws requiring to be
APPENDIX 11. 285
tightened, or from the joints being worn. If the

joints are worn the tripod legs should be well
spread out.
(2) The screw connecting the crown-wheel may be loose,
causing a certain amount of play between that part
of the heliograph screwed on to the tripod head
and the baseplate . In this case the heliograph
should be unscrewed from the tripod and the large
screw connecting the crown-heel, well tightened .
(3) The check nut may be loose.
(4) The thread of the elevating screw may have become
loose in the elevating nut . This may be tightened
by means of the adjusting nut in the elevating
nut.
(5) The plain end of the elevating screw nut may not be
clamped tight, and may shift its position in the
socket nut.
2. There are also a few other causes such as defective lever
springs, worn thread of crown-wheel, and loose mirror .
3. To remedy the latter, take out the mirror (in the same
manner as when replacing a broken mirror) and place some
paper in the mirror frame , so that the mirror may press
against the rim when in position.
8
THE " CC " LAMP .
This lamp is intended for long distance signalling between

permanent or semi-permanent stations. It has a 12 -inch
parabolic reflector, the burner and chimneys being exactly
similar to that used in the " BB " lamp .
2. The lamp is fitted with a socket to screw on to the
heliograph tripod, if required . It has also three tin legs ,
which will raise the lamp about a foot from the ground when
the tripod is not used.
3. A shutter, consisting of five leaves, hooks on to the
reflector. This shutter is worked from the top of the lamp in
a similar manner to the " BB " pattern.
1042
286 ARPENDIX II.
TO TRIM THE " CC " LAMP .
Lift the shutter out of its rests and lay it on the ground
with the glass uppermost. Remove the cowl, tin and glass
chimneys, unfasten the side hooks of the reflector, and lift
the latter from the tin frame . Now raise the latch at the
back and draw out the reservoir, fill with oil and trim the
wick, as in the " BB " lamp. Replace the reservoir, lower
the latch, replace the reflector, fasten the side hooks , put on
the glass and tin chimneys , replace the shutter and cowl.
10
TO LIGHT THE " CC" LAMP .
Remove the shutter and light the wick in the same manner
as the " BB " lamp . Replace the shutter.
11
RANGE OF " BB " AND "" CC LAMPS .
The range of these lamps is so dependent on atmospheric

conditions that it is impossible to lay down any exact limits
for them.
APPENDIX 11. 987
12
ESTABLISHMENT OF SIGNALLERS.
Branch of Assistant Regi- Super-

mental numerary
Service. Instructors .
signallers. signallers .
British.
R. H. A. , R. F. A. , M. 1 4 1
and H. Artillery
0802
R. G. A. 1
1122
R. G. A , S. T. 6
22
Cavalry ... 12
Infantry 2 12 12
Indian.
Cavalry 2 16 4 Guides 12
:.
regimen-
tal sig-
nallers .
21
40
Infantry ... 16
... 21 5
::
Artillery 0
13
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Officers appointed brigade signalling officers should

have a colloquial knowledge of Hindustani.
(2) N.C.Os. of Indian units holding such appointment as
kote, pay or quartermaster duffadars or havildars, clerks , &c . ,
are not to be employed as extra signallers.
(3) Signalling units organized for manœuvres or in the field
should consist of British and Indian signallers.
288 INDEX .
INDEX .
PAGE.
AAA, how sent and entered ... 142
Abstract, Station ...144, 146
Addresses, multiple, instructions regarding ... 186
to and from, how sent and entered 141
Addressor, instructions from, regarding delivery of and reply to
messages 141, 161
Adjutants, Special Reserve, Semaphore qualification 240
Air Line 214
Alphabet, Morse 2
semaphore 28
Answer, general ... 5
‫ وو‬reader, duties of 164
Answerer, duties of 167
Army Form B 225 237
Artillery brigade, equipment and drill 254
B
Backgrounds, how affected by sun 200
" ‫وو‬ 99 distance 199
99 99 improvising ... ... 201
99 "" selection of 199
‫ وو‬to ascertain nature of 201
Badges, qualification for wearing 229
regulations re wearing of 240
Batch working ... ... 188
Battery telephone equipment and drill 263
personnel ... 263
Bearings, use of, in establishing a line of stations 208
INDEX . 289
PAGE.
Begbie's lamp, aligning ... 113
"" extinguishing 113
99 99 general description 109
"9 "" lighting of 112
"" ‫ دو‬signalling with 114
"" trimming 111
Binoculars 114, 117
care of 117
Block sign 153
Break signal 142
Breakdown to be reported 211
Bury crossing 260
Buzzer 118
:
Cable, care of ‫ס‬ 248
" methods of laying 242, 255, 266
"" repair of 265
Cables 242
‫ وو‬field, jointing of 252
99 99 laying of 250
Caller, duties of 163
Calling up, by station calls and " preparative ” 123
"" 99 navy, when working with 192
unknown stations ... 123
Capitals, portions of messages written in, how treated 153
Censor, signature of 136
Certificates ... 239
Charges, rules as to 139
Checking, by initials 172
99 "" "" example of 184
99 of figures, Morse 4
99 "" "" semaphore 27
Circuits 242
Cypher, checking of, groups 152
99 ‫ دو‬by initial letters 184
‫ وو‬sign ... 152
99 treatment of 152
Classes, regimental 218
Classification messages 227
of signallers 229 et seq.
Clear line signal ...133 , 162
:
290 INDEX .
PAGE.
Code time, definition of 136
‫وو‬ "" how entered and sent 138
"9 when relating to a previous date 138
Code, messages in ... 136
Colonial forces, attendance at school of signalling 239
Column, sent and received, completion of 139
Communication, between brigade commander and batteries 255
,, extent of, to be marked on map 206
99 interrupted ... 247
"" opening 202
99 points to be attended to in obtaining 197
Connections, external of instruments 243
99 internal , D Mark I 243
99 99 D Mark II 243
Consumable stores, supply of, to be kept up 210
Corrections to messages, by sending station 176
99 navy and army 196
Counting, rules as to 147
Courses of instruction 239
D.
DD, DD messages, occasions when used 127

Direction of distant stations to be marked 202
Distance between stations, how determined 207
Duties, answer reader's 164
99 answerer's 167
at signal stations, generally 119
:9 caller's 163
29 reader's 165
39 sender's 164
, succession of 169
transmitting stations 167
99 writer's 165
E.
Earths 243, 254, 265
Efficiency, standard of, for certificates 239
"" " 99 "" regimental signallers 239
::
INDEX . 291
PAGE.
Elevation, additional for stations, how obtained 198
Envelope, for messages, filling in of ...143, 145
‫دو‬ ‫وو‬ specimen ... 145
Equipment, responsibilities of signalling officers regarding 210
"" telephone, for artillery brigade 254
"" ‫وو‬ "" battery 263
99 "" ‫ دو‬infantry brigade ... 265
Erase signal 170
Escorts, provision of ...210, 211
Examinations, local, Irish Horse and T.F., rules regarding 237
Exercises, to be carried out by signallers 223
F.
Field Cable ... ... 214
Field Glasses 117
Figures and letters combined 154
"" how checked ... 4
‫دو‬ how counted and signalled 153
"" on semaphore system, method of sending 188
‫ دو‬with Navy 194
Flags, description and advantages of ...
99 drill with ... 5
99 instructions regarding description required 125
Flags, principles of using 6
Form, Army, B 225 ... 233, 234, 237
‫ دو‬completion of sent and received column 139
Form, Army, C 2121 130
‫دو‬ 99 C 398 145
‫ وو‬message, description of 128
99 "" specimen 130
Forms, destruction of 206
‫دو‬ filing of 168, 206
"2 types of, completed 179, 183
Franking of messages 143
Full stop, with figures, treatment of 151
"" 99 "" words, treatment of 151
:
G.
Gas, oxygen 103

⠀⠀
⠀⠀
225
::
::
Groups, test
292 INDEX .
H.
Half-double method of laying cable PAGE .
Heliograph, advantages and disadvantages 257
‫دو‬ aligning 69
"" "" alternate methods 67, 77
‫دو‬ verifying ... 81
‫وو‬ " with duplex mirror 67
‫دو‬ ‫دو‬ ‫ دو‬sighting rod 66
‫دو‬ beat, rules for regulating 81
‫دو‬ care of ... 83
‫دو‬ general description and parts of Mark III 89
‫دو‬ "" "" 69, 72
"" Indian pattern, general instructions IV 91, 96
‫وو‬ instructions with ... 277
99 packing up ... 97
"" reducing light from 88
‫دو‬ searching country with 97
"" subsidiary lines of communication for 85
"" theoreti cal conditions 209
"" using 64
"" with shutter 75
99 working under cover 98
Hyphen, treatment of 86
Horizontal bar, treatment of 151
154
I.
Indian supplement
Infantry brigade telephone equipment and drill 276 et seq.
99 "‫د‬ "" 265
to lay a single line 266
"2 "" to lay two lines at the same time
from one base
Inspection of signallers, annual, instructions regarding 268
Instruction, course of 236
Instructions by addressor 218, 238
service 141
Instructors not to be bound by regulations 138
Instruments, care of 218
248
Irregularitiessetting up at stations
in sending not to be permitted 201
225
INDEX . 293
J
PAGE .
J (alphabetical sign), use of, in semaphore ... 190A
:.
:
K
Key, dummy, method of using 26
90, 92
::
99 spring of heliograph, removing
Laying field cables, details of 250

250
:
‫دو‬ pace of
Lamp, signalling, B (see Begbie's lamp) 109
Letters and figures combined ... 154
initial, treatment of 150
‫دو‬ 220
"" phonetically distinguished 126
Light, calling for ... 103
Lime pencil ...
108
Limelight, aligning 107
" focussing 106
method of lighting 98
"" principle of ... 108
"" range of, in England 105
trimming 98, 270
Limelights, description of 212
Loiterers, orders prohibiting 204
Look-out
Local examinato betions
kept Irish horse and T.F for certificates ... 236
Long-line method of laying cable 258
M
Map, use of, in arranging a line of stations 206
Message checking of and corrections to ... 172
"" containing more than 50 words 177
corrections to, by addressor 161
"" 166
"" DD, DD how entered on form
‫دو‬ when used ... 127, 217
"" 161
" dictation of, to signaller 184
99 example of checkin g by initials 128
"" form, description of
294 INDEX .
PAGE.
Message, form, duplicate copy at receiving terminal 143
interruption in sending 134, 171
99 method of sending 133, 170
‫دو‬ receiving from addressor 161
"" station number of 141
Messages, confidential nature of 205
" delivery of 143, 168, 216
99 envelope for 143, 145
29 disp osal of 144
" enquiries requiring ... 187
"9 entailing use of more than one form 144
"" falling into enemy's hands 206
"" filing of ... 168
"" moving station 147
93 navy and army, method of sending between 191
99 on plain paper 143
99 order of despatch 138
"" practice and test 225
"" redirected, instructions regarding 186
"" signaller's ... 188
"" telegraph offices, to and from 187
99 undelivered instructions regarding 186
"" written, transmission of through telephone on the field 248
Mirror, replacing broken , heliograph 89, 92
Miscellaneous signals, between Navy and Army 196
‫دو‬ table of 190A
Morse alphabet and numerals ... 2
Multiple addresses 186
N.
Names, phonetic, for certain letters ... 220
" proper, how counted and signalled 150
Naval and Military pendant 191
22 "" 99 sign 190a, 191 , 192
Navy, communication with ... 191
Night work, preparations for, to be made by day 202
Number, message ... 141
99 sender's ... 142
Numbers, whole and fractions , treatment of 155
Numerals, long, when used 3
2
39 Morse, how signalled and checked

:
INDEX . 295
PAGE.
Numerals, Roman, treatment of ... 155
28
:
‫وو‬ semaphore
"" "" how signalled and checked 29
0.
Obliterator signal 187
Observation posts, signallers at 216
Observatories, use of 198
Occupation of permanent stations, points for consideration 209
Officer, examining, appointment and duties of 240
93 franking, signature of 142
99 inspecting, appointment of 236
duties of 236
Operations, plan of, early information regarding 211
Orderlies 215
Orders copies of, to be supplied to stations 212
"" for signallers at stations 204
to subordinates ... 211
Origin, office of definition 138
‫وو‬ how sent and entered 138
Outposts signalling communication throughout 213
Oxygen gas generator ... 273
"" 39 method of making 106
P. :
Paragraph messuages 226
Pauses , between letters and words on Morse 2
"" " 99 semaphore... 63
Pencil lime ... 103
Pendant, Naval and Military 191
Permanent stations, occupation of 209
Personnel, telephone for artillery brigade 253
"" for battery 263
"" "" for infantry brigade 265
Phonetic names, for certain letters 220
Pole crossing ... 260
Preamble, use of 129
Prefixes, purpose of 129
99 rules for 133
:
296 INDEX.
PAGE.
Press messages, instructions as to accepting 143, 163
Priority, meaning of ... ... 133
"" orders regarding 212
Private messages, instructions as to accepting 133, 143, 163
Prizes, issue of ... 237
Punctuation 151
R.
Railways, use of, in arranging communication 207
Reader, duties of 165
Receipt, for messages ... 144
Reeling up 262, 264, 269
Reflection of light, laws of 64
Relay ... 121
Reliefs 122, 209
Repeat signal ... 175
Retort, limelight, cleaning 105
S
School , signalling ... 238
Searchlight, application of, to signalling 191
Sections, strength of ... 210
Semaphore, advantages of 29
99 alphabet and special signs 28
29 drill with 61
"" method of learning.. 29
99 navy and army 195
39 principles of 27
29 system, differences in procedure 188
Sender, duties of 164
Sentry, at station ... 204
Service instructions circumstances under which used 138
Shadow spot adjustment of 83, 92
Ships, communication with 191
Signallers, classification of, Regular Forces 229, 231
"" "" 99 Irish Horse 237
99 Territorial Force 237
disposition of, at station 156
inspection of Regular Forces 235
"" Irish Horse ... 236
INDEX. 297
PAGE.
Signallers, inspection of Territorial Forces 236
"" moving at a distant station 204
99 orders for, at stations ... 204
99 responsibilities of individual 169
Signalling, employment of 213
‫دو‬ occasions when used 212
99 school of, courses at 238
visual ... 215
"" year 233
Signature of addressor, order requiring 212
Sketches , freehand 209
Staff officers, to be informed of extent of communication 211
Staffs, position of, to be made known ... 211
Station, accessibility of, to be considered ...198, 207
calls ... ... 122
charge of ... 197
"" distant, picking up ... 203
"" record to be kept at permanent 206
་་ selection of position for 197
19 signals 123
Stations, allotment of men at 119 120, 121
"" cent ral 121
"" definitions of various kinds 118
distance between 207
99 instructions for moving signallers at 125. 204, 208
permanent, occupation of 209
99 transmitting, principles of 120
99 terminal, number of men required at 119
unknown, mode of calling up .124, 127
Starfish method of laying cable 256
Stop signal, responsibility for and method of resuming work
after ... 171
Stop signal, when and how sent and answered 171
Stroke, oblique, how treated 154
Survey points, use of ... 207
Symbols, treatment of certain 154
T
Tangent-screw, heliograph, to put out of gear 76, 91
90
:::
Tangent-spring , replacing broken

Telegraph, wireless 215
298 INDEX.
PAGE.
Telephones, instructions regarding use of 247
99 simple tests for .245, 246
Telescope, aligning ... 116
99 car e of ... 117
99 description of 114
99 focussing 116
99 stand 115
using 116
Terminal stations, disposition of signallers 156
Test group and messages, preparation of 225
Text, mode of signalling 142
Time, importance of. preserving idea of 3
Transmitting stations, disposition of signallers at ... 160
"" duties at ... ... 167
Transports, signalling to and from ... 196
Tree crossing ... ... 261
:
V.
Valleys, use of in arranging communication 207

Visibility of stations, additional elevation to obtain 198
‫دو‬ points to be looked to 207
Visual signalling" .... 215
W.
War, arrangements for 212

W A signal, used by receiving station, procedure 174
WA "" "" ‫ دو‬sending 99 99 174
WB "" ‫ دو‬99 receiving "9 22 174
WB 22 "" ,, sending 99 174
Wireless telegraph 215
Words abbreviated , how treated 142
"" and figures combined 154
combined 148
99 doubtful, to be repeated 174
"" how counted 148
‫ دو‬hyphened .. 150
‫ وو‬important, how treated 153
in preamble, how and when sent and entered 139, 170
"" number of, incorrect 172
INDEX. 299
PAGE.
Words, number of, message checked by 172
99 repetition of, on semaphore system 190A
Work, confidential nature of ... 205
night, preparation for ... ... ... 202
Writer, duties of ... ... 165
:
X.
X, space, use of on message from 129
:
:
Y.
Year, signalling ... 233
:
:
Z.
Z, space on form, signature required ... 128, 143
:
APPENDIX.
Lime-light, large 270, 275

:
m
b
gr
q
la
OFFICIAL COPY.
[Issued with Army Orders, dated February, 1911 .

[All rights reserved.
44
Gen. No.
1827
TRAINING MANUAL-SIGNALLING.
AMENDMENTS .
For Section 217 substitute :-

217. CLASSIFICATION MESSAGES.
Messages used for testing individuals for classification are
made out on A.F. C 2121. Details are given in Section 218,
Note (b).
An example of a Morse " Classification Message " equiva-
lent to 200 letters, or 40 words, is given on page 221. The
time allowed for it, at eight words per minute, is 5 minutes.
The text after " In reply to number," to second " break,”
both exclusive, is composed of three alphabets, arranged in
groups of different lengths.
This represents 16 words of an unintelligible foreign
language, and is counted (in order to arrive at the number
LONDON:
PUBLISHED BY HIS MAJESTY'S STATIONERY OFFICE.
To be purchased, either directly or through any Bookseller, from
WYMAN AND SONS, LIMITED, FETTER LANE, E.C.; or
OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT, EDINBURGH ; or
E. PONSONBY, LTD. , 116, GRAFTON STREET, DUBLIN.
PRINTED BY
HARRISON AND SONS , PRINTERS IN ORDINARY TO HIS MAJESTY,
45-47, ST. MARTIN'S LANE, W.C.
Price, One Penny.
2
of ge
of " words ") as one word for each group. The remainder
Messa
consists of 100 letters, as follows :-
:-
FormNo.
XM DPM HL thirtysix CMDG FI 1/2 FF BN M I
.(121
ASH (bracket) or forward (bracket) (break) fourth X
Army 2
FI 7 FF Z FÍ 9 FF AAA (break) L T (Hyphen) COL
WYNNE HALE FI 3.15 FF PM
MESSAGES
SIGNALS
When preparing messages for semaphore tests, considera-
tion must be given to the difference in sending by semaphore
(e.g., numerical sign counts as one letter, FI as two letters).
AND
For the sake of convenience the following miscellaneous
signals either by Morse or semaphore- will count as
.
shown :-
Full stop, break signal, hyphen, oblique stroke and
horizontal bar, as two letters each.
Inverted commas, underline, and parenthesis or brackets,
as four letters each.
Page 221. Delete example and substitute—
FAorm
."
E
E
Section
217.
)( xample Army
2121
C
.Form
A
"
F
"
. orm MESSAGES
AND
SIGNALS
. No.
Mes
of sage
Prefix
Code
XM
m Word
. s Charg
. e
.DP This
message
on
is Recd
a. t .
m
36 ;a/cof
.
Sent Date
Office
Origin
of
and .Service
Service At
Instructions
. .m of
(Signature Fr . om
HL To- " ranking
Officer
FB.) y-
By-
CMDG 1/2
To BN M I
ASH forward
)o(r
*Sender's
Number Month
of
Day Number
to
reply
In
7
X Fourth Z9 AAA
XVAGE LQDIKO RSOQC FJLTZ
3
YFJM
TBHP VEW CMRNDA OUXY ZTQAI
KSFMPB UWCIA VENBGH XWRJ LNYDGK
PSUZ
From
.-COL
.LT WYNNE
Place HALE
Time 3.15 p.m.
forwarded
be
may
above
)The
.(Z
corrected
now
as
Signature
Addressor
of
person
or
.
Censor authorized
to
telegraph
name
his
.in
should
line
*This
erased
be
required
not
.if
For Section 218 substitute-
218. CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALLERS, REGULAR FORCES. me
add
1. Tests.--Before being classified for proficiency pay and
entitled to wear a badge, signallers must pass the following wil
tests :- fig
wil
(i.) Read a 66 message "" as defined below sent on the helio
of 1
and dummy key or buzzer, at eight words a minute , ¿.e. , in from
5 minutes.
66 (or
(ii. ) Read a message " sent by semaphore at 10 words per
minute, i.e., in 4 minutes, the readers to be not less than T
ofd
500 yards from the sender. long
(iii. ) Read a " half message " sent on the small flag (Morse) this
and lamp, at eight words per minute, i.e., in 2 minutes, T
using the Service telescope, the sender to be such a distance Sect
from the reader that the messages cannot be read with the Cour
naked eye. (Until 1st October, 1912, this rate may be
reduced to six words per minute, viz., the messages may T
Bon 008 od of th
take 31 minutes).
(iv.) Send one " half message " on the large flag at 6 words begi
per minute, i.e., in 3 minute""s. It
be
(v.) Send 66 one message on the small flag (Morse ) lette
heliograph, lamp and dummy key or buzzer , at eight words
per minute , i.e. , in 5 minutes . In
(vi.) Send " one message " by semaphore at 10 words per and
minute , i.e., in 4 minutes.
Assi
Notes on reading and sending Tests (i.e. , Tests (i . ) to (vi.) ) . be T
(a. ) In all reading tests an Assistant Instructor of another
send
unit should send the messages, and the officer conducting the
classification should time them. Each man will be given two (e
messages to read, and the result of the better of the two will calle
be counted for his classification. Both these messages will be suffi
read on the same day. anot
T
5
(b. ) In all the above tests, both sending and reading, the
messages will be made out on Army Form C 2121. The
address to and from will be in ordinary English, and the text
will consist of unintelligible combinations of letters, and of 29
figures, in groups of various lengths. Thus a ' message
will be composed as follows :-The preamble, address to, day
of month, sender's number, in reply to number, and address
from , including both break signals, will consist of 100 letters
(or figures).
The text will consist of three alphabets mixed up in groups
of different lengths. This amounts to 78 letters ; but as the
longer letters occur more frequently than in ordinary English,
this is equivalent to 100 letters.
The letters and other signs will be counted as laid down in
Section 217. The signal VE will be sent, but will not be
counted or written down.
The cipher sign (CC) will not be sent, and the nature
of the message should be explained to the men before they
begin.
It will facilitate checking afterwards if the writers
be ordered to write down the whole of the text in block
letters.
In the same way a " half message " will consist of 50 letters
and 1 alphabets respectively.
(c.) The messages sent should be read, if possible, by
Assistant Instructors of other units ; but, if not, they may
be read by selected signallers of other units.
(d.) Each signaller will, in the sending tests, be allowed to
send one message only on each instrument.
(e.) In all the above tests the readers, with their writers or
callers (as the case may be), will be lined up in pairs at
sufficient interval to prevent their being overheard by one
e another.
The writer down will have his back to the sender. The
6
sender will be at least 500 yards from the reader in all short
distance tests. 1
(f) Sky backgrounds should be avoided as tending to
train signallers to wrong methods.
(9.) In checking messages each letter or figure omitted,
added, misread, or mis-sent (as the case may be), and
each letter or figure altered on the form, will count as one
mistake.
(h.) Signallers should not be recommended for classification
until the officer in charge considers them fit to pass. In
order to ascertain this, signalling officers should hold pre-
liminary tests of their own. Signallers who fail cannot be
allowed another opportunity during that signalling year.
(i ) The officer who conducts the classification is
responsible for the preparation and checking of all the
messages.
(j) Words will not be answered in either sending or
reading tests.
(k.) In heliograph sending tests the reader will " call for
light " whenever necessary.
(vii.) Possess a thorough knowledge of map reading, that
is to say :-
(1. ) Know all the conventional signs.
(2. ) Be able to set a map with, and without, a compass.
(3. ) Be able to identify places both on the map and on
the ground.
(4.) Be capable of measuring distances on a map.
(5.) Be able to recognize the shape of the ground from
the map, i.e., know where the high ground is.
(6.) Understand, and use the prismatic compass for the
purpose of taking bearings.
(7.) Be able to take a bearing off a map.
7
short (viii.) Possess a thorough knowledge of the mechanism of

all signalling instruments, including telephones and lime-
light apparatus, in the case of units which are equipped
g to with them, and the methods of effecting minor repairs to
the same.
tted,
and (ix.) Be capable of aligning heliographs by every method
S one and of focussing telescopes and picking up distant objects
with rapidity and accuracy.
ation (x.) Be thoroughly conversant with all the details of
In counting, sending, transmitting and receiving messages, and
of allpractical workwhich may be required of them in the field.
pre-
t be 2. Standard.- (i. ) Signallers will be classified as 1st class
signaller, 2nd class signaller, or " failed."
is A 1st class signaller must read and send all the tests (i. )
the to (vi.) with an accuracy of 98 per cent. in each case.
(ii.) A 2nd class signaller must do this with an accuracy
g or of 95 per cent. in each case.
(iii.) Any man failing to be a 2nd class signaller will be
Ifor classified as "failed."
(iv.) No man will be classified as 1st class unless he shows
that good knowledge of all the subjects and tests (vii. ) to (x. ),
and no man as 2nd class unless he shows a fair knowledge.
(v.) Signallers may be reduced from 1st class to 2nd class
or from 2nd class to " failed," by the officer who conducts
Dass. the classification, if he does not consider them fit in every
id on way for the higher classification. But a man's classification
cannot be raised on account of good work under sub- para-
graphs (vii.) to (x. ) of paragraph 1
from 3. Officers to conduct the classification.-The following.
officers will conduct the classification practices :--
r the (i. ) In a division the A.D.A.S. (assisted by brigade
signalling officers), or other officer detailed by the G.O.C.
division.
8
(ii. ) In a cavalry regiment, the brigade signalling officer,

nece
or other officer detailed by the G.O.C. -in-C.
part
(iii. ) In Coast Defences, an officer appointed by the G.O.C.
(iv.) In all cases not provided for, a qualified officer of (
trai
another unit to be appointed by the G.O.C. or O.C. con-
cerned.
28t
In (i. ) and (ii. ) the officers mentioned will also classify the finis
signallers employed with the headquarters of their divisions Arr
and brigades. of S
4. Signalling year.-(i. ) For the training of signallers Sec
the year will be taken to last from 1st October to 30th
September.
(ii. ) The usual procedure in the United Kingdom will be
to commence the training of new signallers soon after
manœuvres. It will not be possible, as a rule, for newly-
trained men to be sufficiently advanced in their training to
be capable of classification in the Classification Tests during
the first 6 months of their training, but, should any man
have reached the necessary standard, there is no objection
to their undergoing the classification tests. Fo
(iii.) The time in the United Kingdom between 1st
October and 28th February should be devoted, when the men 1
are not on furlough, to getting them thoroughly efficient in
the ten subjects laid down for classification, and in the wi
classification tests. do
fol
(iv. ) The time between 1st March and 30th September
in the United Kingdom should be devoted to training them
to work with troops (or in " schemes " where the troops are
imaginary) and to become thoroughly efficient in the duties
of a signaller in the field, in accordance with tactical require-
ments. In the case of new signallers it will probably be
9
fficer, necessary to keep them at elementary work for the greater

part of the summer.
G.O.C (v. ) Abroad these dates must be altered to suit local
cer of training arrangements.
con- (vi. ) The classification practices will thus be finished by
28th February. The inspection (see Section 219) should be
Fr the > finished by 30th September and copies of the Return (on
isions Army Form B 225) should reach the Commandant, School
of Signalling, Aldershot, by 31st October.
Section 220 (promulgated by Army Order 118 of 1909). For
allers the last 14 words of the 2nd paragraph substitute “ a
30th portion of the test should be carried out at night and
the lime light apparatus made use of by those units in
ill be possession of it."
after Delete 5th paragraph.
Add at the end-
ewly- 66
ng to Inspecting officers should take steps to ensure that
uring the work is evenly distributed among the men com-
· man posing each station."
›ction For Section 221 , substitute-
1 1st SECTION 221. - IRISH HORSE AND TERRITORIAL FORCE.

e men The signallers of the Irish Horse and Territorial Force
entin will be classified and inspected on similar lines to those laid
1 the down for Regulars in Sections 218 and 220, with the
following exceptions with regard to their classification-
mber (1.) The time limits will be-
them (i.) Large flag, 4 minutes.
Os are (ii.) Helio, small flag, lamp, and dummy key or
luties buzzer, 7 minutes.
juire- (iii. ) Semaphore, 5 minutes.
ly be
H
10
(iv.) In the reading tests the sender will be a fully The

qualified non-commissioned officers who holds colle
a certificate from a school of signalling. It batte
is desirable that the same non-commissioned
officer should send all the tests for one unit. Secti
The reading of the small flag and lamp will
not be through the telescope and the messages,
&c. , will be as laid down for helio and dummy
key. (Section 218, 1. ) In sending tests, the Th
readers may belong to the same unit as the Force
senders, if men of other units cannot be alrea
obtained. date
signa
(2.) They need only be tested with the instruments issued
to their units but in the event of a unit possessing private
equipment, they may be tested with it, the fact being
recorded on Army Form B 225.
(3.) The officers who conduct classification practices will
be qualified Regular officers other than Territorial Force
Adjutants appointed by the G.O.C. -in -C. each command
annually for this purpose.
(4. ) The classification practices may take place up to 15th

July (but not later). No man may take part in the
inspection who has not been classified as a 1st or 2nd Class
signaller during that signalling year.
Section 222, as promulgated by Army Order 118 of 1909,

last line, for " December " read " October ", and add-
" In the case of R.A. of the Regular Forces a copy of
Army Form B 225 completed as regards pages 1 and 2 by
the officer commanding the battery and officer commanding
the brigade, will be forwarded for each battery or company.
(M
11
fully The 3rd and 4th pages will be completed as regards the
Golds collective test, on the Army Form B. 225 of the senior
It battery of the brigade."
oned
unit. Section 223, promulgated by Army Order 118 of 1909, last
will line. After " training " insert 66 or classification. "
ages,
mmy
, the The annual classification of signallers of the Regular
the Forces, Irish Horse and Territorial Force, who have been
be already tested under the existing regulations prior to the
date of this Army Order, will hold good for the current
signalling year.
sued
vate
eing
will
orce
and
5th
the
Class
909,
y of
by
Ling
ny. (M 1205) Wt. 36120-1037 14,000 2/11 H&S 48wo P 11/35
623.7 R101 c.1
Training manual signalling 1907 Repr
087 231 569

UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

Training Manual Signalling 1907

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Training Manual Signalling 1907

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

THE JOHN CRERAR

TRAINING MANUAL SIGNALLING,

[ REPRINTED, WITH AMENDMENTS, to 1st MAY, 1911. ]

GENERAL STAFF, WAR OFFICE .

This manual is issued by command of the Army Council for

VIII.—Establishing and working a Signal Station in

[Reprinted , with amendments , to 1st May, 1911. ]

NOTE. The following books will be used as far as they

CHAPTER I.-PRINCIPLES OF SIGNALLING.

the first, the signaller should be instructed to grasp the letter

The above principles are equally applicable to the

7. In signalling, each word or group is acknowledged before

APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.

In England and similar climates, the larger flags can as a

" DASH," FIRST POSITION.

Movement or Cautions and Words Detail.

7. The Attention Squad-Attention ... The left foot will be brought

Movement or Cautions andWords

For Flag Drill The rear rank will step back

Squad-March ... Odd numbers of the front rank

Right (or Left)- The squad will turn in the re-

Movement or Cautions and Words

On the Right (or All except the file on the

10. FOLDING THE FLAGS (LARGE AND SMALL).

Movement or Cautions and Words Detail.

pole with the right hand, at

Movement or Cautions and Words Detail.

Dot by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

Two Bring the flag smartly back to

Dot in Quick Time Combine the motions of the

Movement or Cautions and Words

Steady Return to the Ready.

Dash by Numbers Pivoting the pole between the

Two Bring the flag smartly back to

Dash in Quick Time Combine the two motions of

Movement or Cautions and Words

Prepare to- Signal . As above.

Order-Flags Seize the pole with the fore-

Movement or Cautions and Words Detail.

Prepare to- Signal. Lower the pole with the right

Ready ... As above.

Dot by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

Movement or Cautions and Words

12. Small Flag Two. Bring the flag smartly back to

Dot in Quick Time Combine the motions of the

Two, Three, &c.,Dots Make the required number of

-Steady. Return to the Ready.

Dash by Numbers- Pivoting the pole between the

Two. Bring the flag smartly back to

Movement or Cautions and Words

Two, Three, &c., Make the required number of

Prepare to -Signal As above.

Order-Flags Seize the pole with the fore-

DOT, FIRST POSITION.

24 CHAP. II.-APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING IT.

Movement or Cautions and Words

Letters and Letter A by Num-

Movement or Cautions and Words

14. LETTERS AND FIGURES IN QUICK TIME .

1. This instrument is only used for instructional purposes.

first the learner should be instructed to make the letters by

3. The apparatus as used in the Royal Navy may have arms